Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

he used to say

  • 1 λέγω

    λέγω (Hom.+; on the mng. of the word ADebrunner, TW IV 71–73) impf. ἔλεγον (3 pl. ἔλεγαν s. B-D-F §82 app.; Mlt-H. 194; KBuresch, RhM 46, 1891, 224). Only pres. and impf. are in use; the other tenses are supplied by εἶπον (q.v., also B-D-F §101 p. 46; Mlt-H. 247), but the foll. pass. forms occur: fut. 3 sg. λεχθήσεται; aor. ptc. fem. sg. λεχθεῖσα (SyrBar 14:1), neut. pl. τὰ λεχθέντα (Jos. 24, 27; Esth 1:18; Papias, Just.), 3 sg. ἐλέχθη and pl. ἐλέχθησαν; pf. 3 sg. λέλεκται; plupf. ἐλέλεκτο; pf. ptc. λελεγμένος (all Just.; B-D-F §101) ‘say’ (beginning w. Hes. [Hom. uses the word in the senses ‘gather, collect’, as Il. 11, 755 al., and mid. ‘select’, as Il. 21, 27, and esp. of stories that one elects to ‘tell over’ or ‘recount’, as Od. 14, 197] and more freq. in Pind.; the usual word since the Attic writers; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.).
    to express oneself orally or in written form, utter in words, say, tell, give expression to, the gener. sense (not in Hom., for this εἶπον, ἐν[ν]έπω, et al.)
    w. an indication of what is said
    α. in the acc. ταύτην τ. παραβολήν Lk 13:6. (τὴν) ἀλήθειαν (Teles p. 4, 14; TestAbr A 16 p. 97, 27 [Stone p. 42]) J 8:45f; Ro 9:1; 1 Ti 2:7. ἀληθῆ (cp. Herodian 4, 14, 4) J 19:35. παροιμίαν οὐδεμίαν 16:29. τὶ καινότερον Ac 17:21 (w. ἀκούω as Pla., Prot. 310a; Dio Chrys. 3, 28; 4, 37). τί λέγουσιν what they say Mt 21:16; cp. Lk 18:6; 1 Cor 14:16. τί λέγω; what shall I say? Hb 11:32. ὸ̔ λέγει Lk 9:33; cp. 2 Ti 2:7; Phlm 21. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7; AcPlCor 1:9. ταῦτα (τοῦτο) λ. (Jos., Vi. 291) Lk 9:34; 11:45b; 13:17; J 2:22; τοιαῦτα λ. Hb 11:14. τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν be in agreement (not only in words: Thu. 4, 20, 4; 5, 31, 6; Polyb. 2, 62, 4; 5, 104, 1; Jos., Ant. 18, 375; 378) 1 Cor 1:10.—Also τινί τι tell someone someth. παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς Lk 18:1. μυστήριον ὑμῖν 1 Cor 15:51. τ. ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν J 16:7. ὸ̔ λέγω ὑμῖν Mt 10:27. μηδενὶ λ. τοῦτο Lk 9:21. οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν they say nothing to him J 7:26. ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 2 Th 2:5.—τὶ πρός τινα (Pla, Gorg. 465a) παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτούς Lk 5:36; cp. 14:7; 20:9.—24:10; 11:53 v.l. W. double acc. ἀδύνατα ταῦτα εἴρηκας Hm 11:19.
    β. by direct discourse or direct question foll., mostly abs. (extremely freq.) Mt 9:34; 12:44; Mk 3:30; Lk 5:39; J 1:29, 36; 1 Cor l2:3; Js 4:13. Also oft. introduced by recitative ὅτι Mt 9:18; Mk 1:15; 2:12; 3:21f; 5:28; 6:14f (on the textual problem s. FNeirynck, ETL 65, ’89, 110–18), 35; 7:20; Lk 1:24; 4:41; 17:10; 21:8 v.l.; J 6:14; 7:12; 8:33; Ac 2:13; 11:3 and oft.—καὶ ἔλεγεν Mk 4:21, 24, 26, 30 may = he used to say (so that they might memorize): WEssame, ET 77, ’66, 121.
    γ. by indirect discourse or indirect question foll.; abs. Mt 21:27; Mk 11:33c; Lk 20:8.—Introduced by ὅτι (Diod S 11, 4, 3; 11, 6, 2; 14, 4, 3; Petosiris, Fgm. 14c; Jos., Bell. 4, 543) Lk 22:70; Ac 20:23.—In acc. w. inf. τίνα λέγουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι εἶναι τ. υἱὸν τ. ἀνθρώπου; Mt 16:13; cp. vs. 15; Lk 9:20; 11:18; 23:2b; 24:23b; J 12:29a; Ac 4:32; 8:9; 17:7.—W. the inf. only Lk 24:23a; Js 2:14; 1J 2:6, 9.
    w. indication of the pers. or thing about which someth. is said, or that is meant by someth.
    α. by a prep. περί τινος (Soph., Thu. et al.) οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἔγνωσαν ὅτι περὶ αὐτῶν λέγει the Pharisees perceived that he was talking about them Mt 21:45. λέγει περὶ αὐτοῦ he said concerning him J 1:47; cp. 2:21; 11:13; 13:18, 22. εἴς τινα (Eur., Med. 453; X., Mem. 1, 5, 1) Ac 2:25; Eph 5:32. ἐπί τινα Hb 7:13. πρός τινα Lk 12:41; Hb 1:7.
    β. by the acc. alone mean someone or someth. (Demosth. 18, 88; Diod S 15, 23, 5; Phalaris, Ep. 142, 1 ἣν λέγω; Ael. Aristid. 48, 35 K.=24 p. 474 D.: τὸν Φιλάδελφον λέγων; Aelian, NA 8, 3 ὸ̔ δὲ λέγω, τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν, VH 3, 36; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; 10, 2; 2 Macc 14:7; Jos., Ant. 6, 86; TestSol 4:6 D τὸν δύστηνον λέγω γέροντα; Just., D. 130, 2 μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ, λέγω Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ …) τ. ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὸ̔ν λέγετε this man whom you mean Mk 14:71. ἔλεγεν τὸν Ἰούδαν J 6:71. συνείδησιν λέγω οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ I mean not your own conscience 1 Cor 10:29. τοῦτο δὲ λέγω but this is what I mean Gal 3:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:12a (Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 3, 12; 2, 11, 1 λέγω δέ … but I mean).—Mt 26:70; Mk 14:68; Lk 22:60. Cp. 4 end.
    γ. w. an indication of the one to whom someth. is said (on the synoptics and Ac s. WLarfeld, Die ntl. Ev. 1925, 237f); mostly in dat. (Aeschyl., Ag. 103; Herodas 4, 42 σοί; POxy 413, 99; s. also 1aα above) Mt 8:7; Mk 2:8, 17f; Lk 3:7; 5:24; J 1:39, 41, 43 and oft.—πρός τινα (Epict. 2, 17, 34 πρὸς ἄλλους ἐρεῖς; TestSol 1:6 D λέγει Νάθαν πρὸς τὸν ἄγγελον; ApcEsdr 6:16; s. also 1aα above) Mk 4:41; 16:3; Lk 4:21; 8:25 (λ. πρὸς ἀλλήλους as Jos., Ant. 2, 108; 9, 239); 9:23; 12:1; 16:1; J 2:3; 3:4; Ac 2:12; 28:4. μετά τινος: ἔλεγον μετʼ ἀλλήλων they said to each other J 11:56.
    δ. in other (s. 1aα, 1bα, 1bγ) prep. uses ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (=ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ v.l.) σὺ τοῦτο λέγεις; do you say this of your own accord? J 18:34 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38] al.). εἴς τινα against someone Lk 22:65. τὶ περί τινος say someth. about or concerning someone J 1:22; Ac 8:34; Tit 2:8. λ. περὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ὅτι say, with reference to the temple, that Lk 21:5. τί σὺ λέγεις περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι; what have you to say about him, since? J 9:17b (λ. τι περί τινος, ὅτι as Jos., Bell. 7, 215). τινὶ περί τινος say to someone about someone w. direct discourse foll. Mt 11:7. Also πρός τινα περί τινος (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 279 πρὸς αὐτὸν περὶ Μωϋσέως) Lk 7:24. πρός τινα ἐπί τινος bring charges against someone before someone Ac 23:30 (λ. ἐπί τινος as Jos., Vi. 258). λ. περί (v.l. ὑπέρ) τινος say (someth.), speak in someone’s defense 26:1.
    ε. in connection w. adverbs and adv. exprs.: Λυκαονιστὶ λ. say in (the) Lycaonian (language) Ac 14:11. καλῶς correctly (X., Mem. 2, 7, 11; 3, 3, 4; TestJob 7:8; EpArist 125; 196) J 8:48; 13:13. ὡσαύτως in the same way Mk 14:31. ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν truly, I tell you Lk 12:44; 21:3. κατὰ ἄνθρωπον (s. ἄνθρωπος 2b) Ro 3:5; Gal 3:15. κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν (s. ἐπιταγή) 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. καθʼ ὑστέρησιν Phil 4:11.
    ζ. w. emphasis on a certain kind of saying: φωνῇ μεγάλῃ in a loud voice Rv 5:12; 8:13 (cp. TestSol 16:1). Also ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 14:7; 9. ἄγγελος ἐν φωνῇ λέγων GJs 20:4 (pap, s. deStrycker p. 387f). Opp. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ (cp. Ps 13:1) 18:7. Also ἐν ἑαυτῷ (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 11 [Stone p. 62]; TestJob 23:8) Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 3:8; 7:39, 49; GJs 1:1,4; 3:1; 5:1; cp. 1:3 (codd.); 2:1 v.l.; 14:1 v.l.
    η. in quotations fr. scripture (but s. also Epict. 1, 28, 4 ὡς λέγει Πλάτων with a quotation) Ἠσαί̈ας λέγει Isaiah says Ro 10:16, 20; 15:12. Μωϋσῆς λέγει 10:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει 11:9. ἡ γραφὴ λέγει (Just., D. 56, 17; cp. Paus. 2, 16, 4 τὰ ἔπη λέγει=the epic poets say) 4:3; 10:11; Gal 4:30; 1 Ti 5:18; Js 4:5; cp. 2:23; J 19:24; 2 Cl 14:2. In the case of the quot. formula λέγει without the subj. expressed, ἡ γραφή or ὁ θεός is easily understood (B-D-F §130, 3; Rob. 392.—On the omission of the subj. [Just., D. 101, 1 al.] cp. Epict. 1, 24, 12 λέγει σοι ‘θὲς κτλ.’=someone says to you ‘lay aside [this and that sign of prestige]’). It could prob. be translated indefinitely it says: Ro 15:10; 2 Cor 6:2; Gal 3:16; Eph 4:8; 5:14. ὁ θεός is obviously the subj. (Clearch., Fgm. 69c; Epict. 1, 1, 10 λέγει ὁ Ζεύς, followed by a divine revelation to Epictetus) Hb 5:6. λέγει ὁ κύριος 2 Cl 13:2; cp. Hb 8:8–10 (λέγει κύριος Am 5:27; Is 1:18; Jer 9:24; ParJer 6:16 al.). W. the passage more definitely indicated (schol. on Pind., O. 7, 66 ἐν τοῖς Μουσαίου λέγεται; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 3, 1179 Wendel v.l. ἐν τῇ γ´ τῆς Μουσαίου Τιτανογραφίας λέγεται ὡς) ἐν Ἠλίᾳ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή Ro 11:2 (Epict. 2, 17, 34 τί λέγει Χρύσιππος ἐν τοῖς περὶ τοῦ ψευδομένου). Δαυὶδ λέγει ἐν βίβλῳ ψαλμῶν Lk 20:42 (Epict. 2, 19, 14 Ἑλλάνικος λέγει ἐν τοῖς Αἰγυπτιακοῖς with quot.). ἐν τ. Ὡσηὲ λέγει Ro 9:25. λέγει ἐν τῷ Ἠσαί̈ᾳ 2 Cl 3:5 (Just., D. 123, 8); cp. ἐν Δαυίδ Hb 4:7. ὁ νόμος λέγει (cp. Pla., Crito 12, 50c; Epict. 3, 24, 43 τί γὰρ λέγει; [i.e. ὁ νόμος θεῖος]) 1 Cor 14:34. λέγει τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Hb 3:7 (Just., D. 124, 1). Of words of Jesus: λέγει ὁ κύριος ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 2 Cl 8:5. λέγει ὁ κύριος 5:2; 6:1. λέγει αὐτός (i.e. ὁ Χριστός 2:7) 3:2. λέγει 4:2.
    θ. Hebraistic, though by no means limited to the OT (s. EKieckers, IndogF 35, 1915, 34ff; B-D-F §420; Mlt-H. 454), is the freq. use of λ. to introduce
    א. direct discourse (like לֵאמֹר), even though it is preceded by a verb of saying, or one that includes the idea of saying. Esp. λέγων is so used, as in the LXX, e.g. after ἀναβοᾶν, ἀνακράζειν Mk 1:23 (cp. Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 3, 9 Jac. ἀνεκεκράγει λέγων), ἀπαγγέλλειν, ἀποκρίνεσθαι, ἀρνεῖσθαι, βοᾶν, γογγύζειν, διαγογγύζειν, διαλογίζεσθαι, διαμαρτύρεσθαι, διαστέλλεσθαι, διδάσκειν, δοξάζειν, εἰπεῖν Mt 22:1; Lk 12:16; 20:2 (s. B-D-F §101, p. 46; s. Rob. 882f; Kieckers, loc. cit. 36f), ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, ἐντέλλεσθαι, ἐπερωτᾶν, ἐπιτιμᾶν, ἐπιφωνεῖν, ἐρωτᾶν, κατηγορεῖν, κηρύσσειν, κράζειν, κραυγάζειν, λαλεῖν, μαρτυρεῖν, μεριμνᾶν, παραινεῖν, παρακαλεῖν, παρατιθέναι παραβολήν, προσεύχεσθαι, προσφωνεῖν, προφητεύειν, συζητεῖν, συλλαλεῖν, φωνεῖν, ψευδομαρτυρεῖν; s. these entries. Also after such verbs as denote an action accompanied by a statement of some kind: ἄγγελος κυρίου … ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων appeared to him and said Mt 1:20; cp. 2:13; προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λ. fell before him and said 8:2; 9:18; cp. 14:33. ἅπτεσθαι 8:3; 9:29. ἔρχεσθαι Mk 5:35; Lk 18:3; 19:18 al.; cp. Lk 1:66; 5:8; 8:38; 15:9; Ac 8:10, 19; 12:7; 27:23f; 1 Cor 11:25 al.
    ב. the content of a written document (2 Km 11:15; 4 Km 10:6.—1 Macc 8:31; 11:57; Jos., Ant. 11, 26) ἔγραψεν λέγων (=יִכְתֹּב לֵאמֹר) he wrote as follows Lk 1:63.
    ג. orders or instructions to be carried out by other persons: ἔπεμψεν λέγων he sent and had them say Lk 7:19. ἀπέστειλεν λ. (Judg 11:14f; Jdth 3:1; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:21 al.) Mt 22:16; 27:19; Lk 7:20; 19:14; J 11:3. If the persons carrying out the orders are named, the ptc. can refer to them Mt 22:16 v.l.
    ד. When it is used w. the ptc. λ. appears in its finite forms ἐμπαίζοντες ἔλεγον they mocked and said Mt 27:41. προσελθὼν αὐτῷ λέγει he approached him and said Mk 14:45. διαρρήξας … λέγει he tore his clothes as he said vs. 63; cp. vs. 67; 15:35; Lk 6:20; J 1:36; Hb 8:8a al.—Also pleonastically (TestSol 2:2; TestJob 23:4; cp. Homeric ἀμειβόμενος προσέειπε Il. 3, 437 al., προσηύδα 14, 270 al.) ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει he answered Mk 8:29b; 9:5, 19; 10:24; 11:22; Lk 3:11; 11:45; 13:8. κράξας λέγει he cried out Mk 5:7; 9:24 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 109, 29 [Stone p. 66] κράζων καὶ λέγων; ApcEsdr 1:2 κράξας λέγων).
    ι. Now and then short exprs. with λ. are inserted as parentheses (B-D-F §465, 2; Rob. 434): πολλοί, λέγω ὑμῖν, ζητήσουσιν many, I tell you, will seek Lk 13:24. ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λέγω 2 Cor 11:21b. ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 6:13.
    κ. ptc. w. the article τὰ λεγόμενα what was said (EpArist 215, 298; TestSol 15:13; ApcEsdr 2:15; Jos., Ant. 3, 85; 207; Just., D. 46, 4; 115, 1) Lk 18:34. προσεῖχον τ. λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τ. Φιλίππου (προσέχω 2b) Ac 8:6 (προσέχ. τοῖς λεγ. as Jos., Ant. 13, 303; τὰ λ. ὑπό τινος as Bell. 7, 56; 423; Esth 3:3, also Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 24, p. 408, 19 ὑπὸ τῶν μάντεων; Fgm. 30 p. 417, 23 Jac.; Epict. 1, 18, 1; SIG 679, 87). τὰ ἢ λεχθέντα ἢ πραχθέντα (Ps.-Libanius, Charact. Ep. p. 48, 18; 64, 18; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 55) Papias (2:15) in Eus., HE 3, 39, 15 (=Geb., Harn., Zahn 15, p. 72, 17).
    to express oneself in a specific way, say
    ask w. direct question foll: Mt 9:14; 15:1; 18:1; Mk 5:30f. ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει the Master asks 14:14. W. dat. of pers. and a direct question foll.: Mt 9:28a; 15:34; 16:15; 20:6.
    answer (Lucian, Syr. Dea 18; TestSol 5:8 al.; ApcMos 5) Mt 17:25; Mk 8:24; J 1:21; 18:17b. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse: Mt 4:10; 8:26; 9:28b; 14:17; 15:33; 18:22; 19:7, 20 al. W. dat of pers. and direct discourse introduced by ὅτι Mt 19:8.
    order, command, direct, enjoin, recommend more or less emphatically (Syntipas p. 9, 4; Num 32:27; TestSol 4:7 D; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 21 [Stone p. 44]) τὶ someth. 2 Cl 6:4. ἃ λέγω Lk 6:46. τί τινι command someone (to do) someth. ὅ τι ἂν λέγῃ ὑμῖν J 2:5b (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 8 [Stone p. 10]); cp. Ac 21:23 (s. Num 32:31). ὅ ὑμῖν λέγω, πᾶσιν λέγω, γρηγορεῖτε the order I give to you I give to everyone: be on your guard! Mk 13:37 (for the formal nuance cp. reff. at end of this parag.). Gener. w. dat. of pers. and direct discourse foll.: Mt 5:44; 6:25; 8:4, 9; 26:52; Mk 3:3, 5; 5:8; 6:10; Lk 6:27; 7:8; J 2:7f. W. dat. of pers. and inf. foll.: Rv 10:9; 13:14; w. an inf. and a negative forbid (X., An. 7, 1, 40) Mt 5:34, 39.—Here belongs χαίρειν τινὶ λέγειν (Epict. 3, 22, 64) extend a greeting to someone, since the greeting consists in saying χαῖρε=‘may you prosper’ 2J 10f. W. ἵνα foll. recommend that, tell to τῷ λαῷ λέγων … ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. οὐ περὶ ἐκείνης λέγω ἵνα ἐρωτήσῃ I do not recommend that anyone should pray about that (sin) 1J 5:16. W. inf. foll.: Ro 2:22.—τάδε λέγει is the formal style of one who is giving an order (introductory formula for the edicts of the Persian kings [IMagnMai 115, 4]; in the OT a favorite method of introducing a prophetic statement [Thackeray p. 11]) Ac 21:11, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (s. Gerhard, Philol. 64, 1905, 27ff; Thieme 23; GRudberg, Eranos 11, 1911, 177f; LLafoscade, De epistulis imperatorum 1902, 63 and 77. Roman edicts gener. use the simple λέγει as in the praescriptio of SEG IX, 8 I, 1–3 αὐτοκράτωρ Καίσαρ Σεβαστὸς … λέγει; also by Augustus: Jos., Ant., 16, 162; s. MBenner, The Emperor Says ’75).
    assure, assert; w. direct discourse foll. Esp. in the formulas λέγω σοι, λ. ὑμῖν, ἀμὴν (ἀμὴν) λ. ὑμῖν (TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 19f [Stone p. 18]) Mt 11:22; 12:31; 19:24; 23:39; Mk 11:24; Lk 4:25; 7:9, 28; 9:27.—Mt 5:26; 6:2, 5; 8:10; Mk 3:28; 9:41; 10:15; Lk 4:24; 18:17, 29; 23:43; J 1:51; 3:3, 5, 11; 5:19, 24f; 6:26, 32 al.
    maintain, declare, proclaim as teaching, w. direct discourse foll.: Gal 4:1; 1J 2:4. Foll. by acc. and inf. (X., Symp. 5, 5) Mt 22:23; Mk 12:18; Lk 20:41; 23:2b; Ro 15:8; 2 Ti 2:18. Foll. by ὅτι and direct discourse Mk 12:35b; 1 Cor 15:12. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse after ὅτι Mt 5:20, 22, 28, 32; 8:11 al. Someth. like interpret εἰς w. ref. to Eph 5:32.—σὺ λέγεις (that is what) you maintain Mt 27:11; Mk 15:2; Lk 23:3 (cp. σὺ εἶπας Mt 26:25 and s. εἶπον 1a). Cp. also Lk 22:70; J 18:37 (s. OMerlier, RevÉtGr 46, ’33, 204–19; Goodsp., Probs. 64–68 [strong affirmative, yes]; MSmith, JBL 64, ’45, 506–10 [intentionally ambiguous, so you say, Tannaitic Parallels to the Gospels, ’51, 27–30]; DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’70/71, 213–26). τί λέγει ἡ γνῶσις; what does Gnosis teach about this? With the answer in direct discourse B 6:9 (cp. Epict. 3, 13, 11 καὶ τί λέγει [i.e., ὁ λόγος ὁ τῶν φιλοσόφων=philosophy]; direct discourse follows).
    of written communications (Hdt. 3, 40; 122; 8, 140; UPZ 68, 5 [152 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 13, 80) 1 Cor 6:5; 7:6; 15:51; 2 Cor 6:13; 8:8; Gal 5:2; Phil 4:11; Col 2:4; Phlm 21, al. in Paul.
    to inform about / tell of someth., speak, report (Diog. L. 1, 31) τινί to someone Mk 7:36. τὶ about someth. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 16 νῦν λέξομεν τὰς Κύρου πράξεις) τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ of his death (lit., departure) Lk 9:31. τὰ περὶ τ. βασιλείας Ac 1:3. τὰ γινόμενα ὑπʼ αὐτῶν αἰσχρόν ἐστιν καὶ λέγειν it is a disgrace even to speak of the things they do Eph 5:12 (Demosth. 10, 27 ὸ̔ … οὔτε λέγειν ἄξιον). τινὶ περί τινος bring a report about someone to someone Mk 1:30; 8:30. Likew. τινί τινα Phil 3:18.
    to identify in a specific manner, call, name (Aeschyl. et al.) w. double acc. (Epict. 2, 19, 19 τί Στωικὸν ἔλεγες σεαυτόν; Diog. L. 8, 88 τὴν ἡδονὴν λέγειν τὸ ἀγαθόν=call pleasure the [real] good; 2 Macc 4:2; Just., D. 61, 1 ἀρχηστρατηγὸν ἑαυτὸν λέγει) τινά τι describe someone as someth. τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν; why do you call me good? Mk 10:18; Lk 18:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν κύριον David calls him Lord Mk 12:37. πατέρα ἴδιον ἔλεγεν τὸν θεόν he called God his Father J 5:18. οὐκέτι λέγω ὑμᾶς δούλους I no longer call you slaves 15:15; cp. Ac 10:28; Rv 2:20. Pass. be called, named Mt 13:55; Hb 11:24. ὁ λεγόμενος the so-called (Epict. 4, 1, 51 οἱ βασιλεῖς λεγόμενοι; Socrat., Ep. 14, 7 ὁ λ. θάνατος) λεγόμενοι θεοί so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5 (Herm. Wr. 2, 14 the λεγόμενοι θεοί in contrast to μόνος ὁ θεός. Somewhat differently Jos., Ant. 12, 125 Ἀντίοχος ὁ παρὰ τοῖς Ἕλλησιν θεὸς λεγόμενος). οἱ λεγόμενοι ἀκροβυστία ὑπὸ τῆς λ. περιτομῆς those who are called ‘the uncircumcised’ (i.e. gentiles) by the so-called circumcision (i.e. Jews) Eph 2:11. ὁ λεγόμενος (B-D-F §412, 2; Rob. 1107; cp. BGU 1117, 9 [13 B.C.]; PRyl 133, 11; 137, 19; 2 Macc 12:17; 14:6; 3 Macc 1:3; TestAbr B 13 p. 118, 14 [Stone p. 84]; TestJob 46:5; 47:1; Just., A I, 22, 1, D. 32, 1) who is called … Mt 1:16; 27:17; whose surname is (Appian, Liby. 49 §213 Ἄννων ὁ μέγας λεγόμενος; Jos., Ant. 13, 370, Vi. 4) 10:2; Col 4:11; by name Mt 9:9; 26:3, 14; 27:16; Mk 15:7; Lk 22:47; J 9:11.—Of things: of the name of a star Rv 8:11. Of place-names (BGU 326, 19 [II A.D.]; 2 Macc 9:2; 12:21) Mt 2:23; 26:36; J 4:5; 11:54; 19:13; Ac 3:2; 6:9; Hb 9:3. Of the local, vernacular name λ. Ἑβραϊστί J 5:2 v.l.; 19:17b.—In the transl. of foreign words (which) means: ὅ ἐστιν κρανίου τόπος λεγόμενος which means ‘Place of a Skull’ Mt 27:33b. Cp. also J 4:25; 11:16; 20:24; 21:2. Also ὸ̔ λέγεται 20:16. ὸ̔ λ. μεθερμηνευόμενον which, when translated, means 1:38. ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται Ac 9:36.—Other exx. of the significance mean (Aeschyl. et al.) are Gal 4:1; 2 Cl 6:4; 8:6 Cp. 1bβ.—B. 1253f; 1257; 1277. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. S. λόγος, ῥῆμα, λαλέω.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λέγω

  • 2 ἄν

    ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,
    A

    εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2

    , 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.
    A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.
    I WITH INDICATIVE:
    1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,
    a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh.

    καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4

    . 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said,

    εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c;

    εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3

    .
    c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.
    d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.
    2 with [tense] fut. ind.:
    a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176;

    ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80

    ; so in Lyr.,

    μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68

    , cf. I.6(5).59.
    b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers,

    σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140

    ;

    οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d

    , cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313;

    οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36

    (corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.
    II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future,

    οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54

    , al.
    III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):
    a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition:

    ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    ;

    οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b

    :—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.
    b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e;

    ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116

    , cf. D.1.26, al.
    c with protasis understood:

    φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269

    ; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447;

    οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240

    , cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time,

    Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85

    .
    d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.
    e in questions, expressing a wish:

    τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100

    , cf.A.Ag. 1448;

    πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389

    : hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty,

    τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94

    ; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.
    f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.
    g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis:

    ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231

    , cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag.,

    θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186

    ;

    τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605

    .
    h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.
    IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part.,

    τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b

    ) representing ind. or opt.:
    1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.
    2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.
    b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.
    3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:
    a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.
    b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.
    4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional,

    ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c

    (codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk.,

    νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8

    , cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.
    I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once

    εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288

    , twice

    εἴπερ ἄν 5.224

    , 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.
    2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε (

    ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412

    ), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.
    3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep.,

    σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32

    ;

    ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e

    ;

    μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a

    (where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc.

    ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156

    ( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.
    II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc.

    εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597

    ),

    εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353

    ; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in

    ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81

    .
    2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15;

    ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6

    :—similarly after a preceding opt.,

    οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d

    .
    III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:
    1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.:

    αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213

    :—so with relat.,

    οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175

    .
    2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom.,

    εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526

    ; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.
    IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as

    ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56

    ;

    ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136

    (iv A. D.);

    ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19

    ; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.
    C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119;

    εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295

    ; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71;

    διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b

    : inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.
    D GENERAL REMARKS:
    I POSITION OF ἄν.
    1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as

    εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281

    -4; rarely by τις, as

    ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14

    :—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as

    εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355

    , cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose,

    ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45

    ;

    ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420

    : also

    ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e

    , cf. 850a;

    ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c

    .
    2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.
    3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25;

    οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2

    ; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48;

    οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b

    ;

    οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12

    .
    4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause,

    ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax

    <*>37.
    II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words,

    ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333

    , cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15;

    ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244

    , cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.
    2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.
    III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι)

    , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935

    :—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν)

    εἰ.. Isoc.10.48

    :—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.
    IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others:

    πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049

    : even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,
    A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl.,

    ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b

    ; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50;

    ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4

    : not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν

  • 3 εἶπον

    εἶπον (Hom.+) used as 2 aor. of λέγω ‘say’ (B-D-F §101, p. 46); subj. εἴπω, impv. εἶπον; inf. εἰπεῖν, ptc. εἰπών. Somet. takes 1 aor. endings (Meisterhans3-Schw. 184, 6; Schweizer 182; Mayser 331; EpArist index) εἶπα, εἶπας, εἶπαν; impv. εἰπόν Mk 13:4; Lk 22:67; Ac 28:26 (on the accent s. W-S. §6, 7d; Mlt-H. 58. On the other hand, εἶπον acc. to PKatz, TLZ 61, ’36, 284 and B-D-F §81, 1), εἰπάτω, εἴπατε (GrBar 13:2), εἰπάτωσαν; ptc. εἴπας Ac 7:37, fem. εἴπασα J 11:28 v.l.; Hv 3, 2, 3; 4, 3, 7. Fut. ἐρῶ; pf. εἴρηκα, 3 pl. εἰρήκασιν and εἴρηκαν (Rv 19:3), inf. εἰρηκέναι; plpf. εἰρήκειν. Pass. 1 aor. ἐρρέθην (ἐρρήθην v.l. Ro 9:12, 26; Gal 3:16), ptc. ῥηθείς; pf. εἴρηται, ptc. εἰρημένος (B-D-F §70, 1; 81, 1; 101 p. 46; W-S. §13, 13; Rob. index) ‘say, speak’
    to express a thought, opinion, or idea, say, tell
    w. direct or indirect obj. or equivalent τὸν λόγον Mt 26:44. ὅσα Lk 12:3. τί vs. 11; a parable tell (Artem. 4, 80 Μενεκράτης εἶπεν ὄνειρον) 19:11; the truth 2 Cor 12:6 and oft. τοῦτο ἀληθές this as someth. true= this truly J 4:18. τί εἴπω; what shall I say? J 12:27. As a rhetor. transition formula (s. also 3 below) τί ἐροῦμεν; what shall we say or conclude? what then? Ro 3:5; 6:1; 7:7; 9:14, 30. λόγον εἴς τινα say someth. against someone Lk 12:10; also κατά τινος Mt 5:11; 12:32. τί τινι say someth. to someone Gal 3:16. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (cp. Lucian, Tim. 20) Lk 7:40. τί εἴπω ὑμῖν; what shall I say to you? 1 Cor 11:22. τὶ πρός τινα say someth. to someone (Pla., Prot. 345c; Herodas 2, 84; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 6, 20, 6; Ex 23:13; Jos., Vi. 205) a parable Lk 12:16; speak w. reference to someone Mk 12:12; Lk 20:19. Also πρὸς ταῦτα to this Ro 8:31. τὶ περί τινος say someth. about someone or someth. (X., Vect. 4, 13) J 7:39; 10:41. εἰρήκει περὶ τοῦ θανάτου he had referred to death 11:13. ὑπὲρ (περὶ v.l.) οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον of whom I spoke J 1:30 (introducing dir. speech). W. acc. of pers. ὸ̔ν εἶπον of whom I said vs. 15; cp. ὁ ῥηθείς the one who was mentioned Mt 3:3. εἰπεῖν τινα καλῶς speak well of someone Lk 6:26. κακῶς speak ill of someone Ac 23:5 (Ex 22:27). W. omission of the nearer obj., which is supplied fr. the context Lk 22:67; J 9:27 al. As an answer σὺ εἶπας sc. αὐτό you have said it is evasive or even a denial (as schol. on Pla. 112e Socrates says: σὺ ταῦτα εἶπες, οὐκ ἐγώ. S. also the refusal to give a clearly affirmative answer in Const. Apost. 15, 14, 4 οὐκ εἶπεν ὁ κύριος ‘ναί’, ἀλλʼ ὅτι ‘σὺ εἶπας’.—λέγω 2e end) Mt 26:25, 64.—W. indication of the pers., to whom someth. is said: in the dat. Mt 5:22; 8:10, 13, 19, 21 and oft. τινὶ περί τινος tell someone about someth. 17:13; J 18:34. Also πρός τινα for the dat. (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 1; Jos., Ant. 11, 210) Mk 12:7; Lk 1:13, 34, 61 and very oft. (w. acc. εἶπον τὸν ἄγγελον GrBar 6:3; 10:7).
    w. direct discourse foll.: Mt 2:8; 9:22; 12:24, 49; 14:29; 15:16, 32; 17:17 and very oft. οὐδὲ ἐροῦσιν= nor will they be able to say Lk 17:21 (cp. Herodas 4, 73 οὐδʼ ἐρεῖς, with direct discourse foll. as in Lk); of someth. said in the past J 14:28.—As a formula introducing an objection (Diod S 13, 21, 5 ἐροῦσί τινες ἴσως; Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 47 ἴσως οὖν ἐρεῖ τις) ἀλλὰ ἐρεῖ τις (X., Cyr. 4, 3, 10; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 16 §59 ἀλλὰ … ἐρεῖ τις; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 9, 16 p. 98, 1; 5 Lag.) 1 Cor 15:35; Js 2:18 (on various views, DVerseput, NTS 43, ’97, 108 n. 22). ἐρεῖς οὖν Ro 11:19; w. μοι added 9:19. πρὸς ἡμᾶς Ac 21:13 D. Inserted τίς οὖν αὐτῶν, εἰπέ, πλεῖον ἀγαπήσει αὐτόν; which one, tell me, will love him more? Lk 7:42 v.l.
    w. ὅτι foll. (Diod S 12, 16, 5; 12, 74, 3; Jos., Vi. 205) Mt 28:7, 13; J 7:42; 8:55; 16:15; 1J 1:6, 8, 10; 1 Cor 1:15; 14:23 al.
    w. acc. and inf. foll. Ro 4:1 (text uncertain).
    regularly used w. quotations: Tit 1:12; usually fr. the OT ἐρρέθη Ro 9:12; καθὼς εἴρηκεν Hb 4:3. τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Mt 1:22. ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ 22:31. διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ac 2:16; cp. Mt 2:17, 23; 4:14; 8:17; 12:17; 13:35; 24:15 (Just., D. 27, 1 διὰ … Ἠσαίου οὕτως εἴρηται) al. τὸ εἰρημένον what is written Lk 2:24; Ac 13:40; Ro 4:18.—EHowind, De ratione citandi in Ciceronis Plutarchi Senecae Novi Testamenti scriptis obvia, diss. Marburg 1921.
    with questions w. direct discourse foll. (Epict. 3, 23, 18a=ask; Zech 1:9a) Mt 9:4; 17:19, 24; 18:21; 20:32; 26:15 al. W. dat. of pers. Mt 13:10, 27.
    w. adv. modifier ὁμοίως Mt 26:35. ὡσαύτως 21:30; or an adv. expr. ἐν παραβολαῖς in parables= parabolically 22:1. διὰ παραβολῆς using a parable Lk 8:4. W. καθὼς of someth. said in the past (Jos., Ant. 8, 273 καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ προφήτης; cp. Dt 1:21; 19:8; Is 41:22 τὰ ἐπερχόμενα εἴπατε ἡμῖν) Mt 28:6; Mk 14:16; Lk 22:13; cp. J 16:4. εἰπὲ λόγῳ say the word Lk 7:7; Mt 8:8. διὰ φωνῆς πνεύματος ἁγίου through the voice of the Holy Spirit AcPl Ha 11, 5.
    to answer a question, answer, reply (Ps.-Pla., De Virt. 2, 376d οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot answer that; Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 21 p. 401D ἔχειν εἰπεῖν=be able to answer) Mt 15:34; 16:14; 26:18 al. On its use w. ἀποκρίνεσθαι, freq. in narrative to denote transition, s. ἀποκρ. 2. Also without a preceding question in conversation Mt 14:18; 15:27; Mk 9:39; Lk 1:38 and oft.
    to reach a conclusion by reasoning, conclude, as in the transitional formula τί ἐροῦμεν; what conclusion are we to draw? Ro 3:5; 6:1; 9:14, 30; on Ro 4:1 s. FDanker, in Gingrich Festschr. ’72, 103f. S. also 1a.
    to apply a name or term to someone, call w. double acc. (Maximus Tyr. 14, 5c κόλακα τὸν Ὀδυσσέα; Diog. L. 6, 40 Diogenes the Cynic is called a ‘dog’; SibOr 4, 140) ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεούς J 10:35. ὑμᾶς εἴρηκα φίλους 15:15 (cp. Od. 19, 334; X., Apol. 15; Lucian, Tim. 20).
    to give instructions or orders, tell, order (Ex 19:8b; 2 Ch 24:8; w. inf. foll.: Ex 35:1b; Wsd 9:8; Epict. 1, 14, 3 ὅταν [ὁ θεὸς] εἴπῃ τοῖς φυτοῖς ἀνθεῖν, ἀνθεῖ; Aberciusins. 17) εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν he ordered that she be given someth. to eat Mk 5:43. εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι he told them to place this also before (the people) 8:7. W. ἵνα foll. Mt 4:3; Mk 9:18; Lk 4:3.
    to tell oneself someth., think. Corresp. to אָמַר בְּלִבּוֹ the expr. εἰπεῖν ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Esth 6:6; Tob 4:2 BA; S has ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ) means say to oneself or quietly, think (to oneself) Mt 9:3; Lk 7:39; 16:3; 18:4; also ἐν τῃ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ (Dt 8:17; 9:4; Ps 9:27; 13:1; s. above) Lk 12:45; Ro 10:6.—In mss. and edd. εἶπον freq. interchanges w. λαλέω, λέγω, φημί, and is v.l. in Mt 19:18; Mk 6:16; Lk 19:30; J 7:45, 50; 9:10; 13:24; Ac 23:7.—B. 1253f. DELG s.v. ἔπος 2. Frisk s.v. εἶπον and ἔπος. M-M. TW. Also s. λέγω.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἶπον

  • 4 εἰμί

    εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.
    be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).
    to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.
    gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.
    to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.
    in explanations:
    α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.
    β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.
    be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, be
    of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.
    involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.
    of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.
    of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).
    to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.
    to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.
    to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8. Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.
    to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).
    to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.
    to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.
    to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.
    as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).
    (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.
    w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).
    α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).
    β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.
    γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).
    w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).
    Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.
    In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.
    to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰμί

  • 5 εἰς

    εἰς prep. w. acc. (Hom.+; s. the lit. under ἀνά, beg., also ATheimer, Die Präp. εἰς, ἐν, ἐκ im NT: Progr. z. 24. u. 29. Jahresbericht des niederösterr. Landes-Real-u. Obergymnasiums Horn 1896; 1901; AOepke, TW II 418–32), indicating motion into a thing or into its immediate vicinity or relation to something.
    extension involving a goal or place, into, in, toward, to
    into, toward, to after verbs of going, or those that include motion toward a place (also after subst. as ἄφιξις Tat. 37, 1 or πορεία 38, 1); so after ἄγω, ἀκολουθέω, ἀναβαίνω, ἀνάγω, ἀναχωρέω, ἀνέρχομαι, ἄπειμι, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποδημέω, ἀποπλέω, γίνομαι δεῦρο, διαβαίνω, διαπεράω, διασῴζω, διέρχομαι, διώκω, εἰσάγω, εἴσειμι, εἰσέρχομαι, εἰσπορεύομαι, ἐκπηδάω, ἐκπλέω, ἐκπορεύομαι, ἐμβαίνω, ἐμβάλλω, ἐνδύνω, ἐξέρχομαι, ἐπανάγω, ἐπιβαίνω, ἐπιστρέφω, ἔρχομαι (s. Goodsp., Probs. 56f), εὐθυδρομέω, ἥκω, καθίζω, καταβαίνω (s. Goodsp., Probs. 52–54), κατάγομαι, καταντάω, καταπλέω, καταφεύγω, κατέρχομαι, μεταβαίνω, ὁρμάω, παραβάλλω, παραγίνομαι, πέτομαι, πλέω, πορείαν ποιοῦμαι, πορεύομαι, προάγω, συμβάλλω, συνάγομαι, συναναβαίνω, συνέρχομαι, ὑπάγω, ὑποστρέφω, ὑποχωρέω, φεύγω, χωρέω; s. these entries.
    α. extension toward, in the direction of, a specific place to be reached. Hence w. nouns that denote an accessible place εἰς τὸν οἶκον into the house Mt 9:7; synagogue Ac 17:10; heaven Lk 2:15; abyss 8:31. φεύγειν εἰς τὰ ὄρη Mk 13:14. W. names of places and countries to Spain Ro 15:24, 28. εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ vs. 25 al. Also on, in εἰς (τὰς) ὁδούς Lk 14:23; Mt 10:5, 10; εἰς ὁδόν Mk 6:8; 10:17. εἰς ἀγρόν 16:12. In another sense ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος 3:13; Mt 15:29.In the vicinity of, near, to (Jos., Vi. 115 εἰς τ. κώμην) εἰς (τὴν) θάλασσαν Mk 7:31; 3:7 v.l.; Mt 17:27. εἰς πόλιν (Hdt. 2, 169; 4, 200, 1; Diod S 15, 32, 2 παραγενόμενος εἰς πόλιν) J 4:5; cp. vs. 28. εἰς τό μνημεῖον 11:31, 38; 20:1, 3f (cp. vs. 6). ἐγγίζειν εἰς (Tob 11:1) Mt 21:1; Mk 11:1; Lk 18:35; 19:29. εἰς τοὺς φραγμούς to the hedges 14:23. κλίνειν τὸ πρόσωπον εἰς τ. γῆν toward the ground 24:5.
    β. with focus on the area within the point reached. After verbs of sending, moving, etc., which result in movement or include a movement of the body to, into, among εἰς τὴν πόλιν into the city Mt 26:18 al.; boat Mt 8:23; J 6:17; world J 1:9; εἰς τ. ναόν 2 Th 2:4; εἰς (τὸ) μέσον (Sir 27:12; cp. 48:17): ἔστη εἰς τὸ μέσον (X., Cyr. 4, 1, 1), he (came and) stood among them J 20:19, 26; cp. Mk 14:60; Lk 6:8, also ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μ. get up and come here Mk 3:3.—δέχεσθαι εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας take in (into) one’s arms Lk 2:28 (cp. Jos., Ant. 8, 28).
    γ. of movement directed at a surface of an area on, in: of striking (PRyl 145, 13f [38 A.D.] ἔδωκεν πληγὰς πλείους εἰς πᾶν μέρος τοῦ σώματος=gave many blows all over his body; cp. PTebt 39, 32) τύπτειν εἰς τ. κεφαλήν on the head Mt 27:30 (cp. Arrian, Anab. 2, 26, 4 ἐμβάλλειν εἰς τ. κεφαλήν). ῥαπίζειν εἰς τὴν σιαγόνα on the cheek 5:39.—εἰς τ. ὄμματα Mk 8:23; εἰς τ. ὁδόν 11:8; ἀναπίπτειν εἰς τ. ἔσχατον τόπον sit in the lowest place Lk 14:10; cp. vs. 8. εἰς τὴν χεῖρα, τοὺς πόδας on his hand, his feet Lk 15:22.
    δ. of a position within a certain area be at, be in, be on εἰς is freq. used where ἐν would be expected (s. 1bβ below; for Mark usage s. JO’Rourke, JBL 85, ’66, 349–51)—(Hdt. 7, 239, 1; Diod S 13, 101, 3; 20, 30, 2; Vett. Val. index III p. 394b; PTebt 38, 14 [113 B.C.] εἰς ὸ̔ν ἐνοικεῖ … οἶκον; POxy 294, 6 [22 A.D.]; 929, 12; BGU 385, 5; 423, 7; Kaibel 134; LXX. Cp. GHatzidakis, Einl. in die neugr. Gramm. 1892, 210f; Mlt. 62f, 234f; Rob. 592f; Rdm.2 14; 140; B-D-F §205; EOldenburger, De Or. Sib. Elocutione, diss. Rostock 1903, 26ff) εἰς τ. κοίτην εἶναι Lk 11:7. εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Mk 10:10. οἱ εἰς τ. οἶκόν μου (ὄντες) Lk 9:61. οἱ εἰς μακρὰν (ὄντες) Ac 2:39. καθημένου εἰς τὸ ὄρος Mk 13:3 (cp. Musonius 43, 18 H. καθῆσθαι εἰς Σινώπην). ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν (ὤν) he who is in the field 13:16. γίνεσθαι εἰς τὴν Καφαρναούμ happen in Capernaum Lk 4:23. εἰς συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσθε you will be beaten in the synagogues Mk 13:9. εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον he found himself in A. Ac 8:40 (cp. Esth 1:5 τοῖς ἔθνεσιν τοῖς εὑρεθεῖσιν εἰς τ. πόλιν; Gen 37:17). ἀποθανεῖν εἰς Ἰερ. Ac 21:13 (cp. Aelian, VH 7, 8 Ἡφαιστίων εἰς Ἐκβάτανα ἀπέθανε). κατοικεῖν εἰς Ἰερ. Ac 2:5; cp. Mt 2:23; 4:13; Ac 7:4; Hb 11:9 (cp. Thu. 2, 102, 6; X., An. 1, 2, 24; Num 35:33; 2 Ch 19:4). χάριν, εἰς ἣν στῆτε the favor in which you stand 1 Pt 5:12. ἔχειν βιβλίον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας have a book in one’s hands Hv 1, 2, 2. πηλὸς γάρ ἐσμεν εἰς την χεῖρα τοῦ τεχνίτου for we are clay in the hand of the artisan. εἰς ταύτην τὴν πόλιν in this city 2, 4, 3 al.—εἰς=at or on (BGU 845, 20f; τραπέζας … εἰς ἃς ἤσθιον οἱ πτωχοί TestJob 25:5) ὁ ὢν εἰς τ. κόλπον τ. πατρός who leans on the breast (or reclines in the lap) of the Father (=who is on intimate terms w. the Father, s. κόλπος) J 1:18. In AcPlCor 2:35 the prepositions εἰς and ἐν appear to be carefully distinguished: τὰ δεσμὰ εἰς τὰς χείρας ἔχω … καὶ τὰ στίγματα ἐν τῷ σώματί μου.
    ε. of presence in an area determined by other objects, esp. after verbs of sending, moving, etc. including ἀπολύω, ἀποστέλλω, βάλλω, βαπτίζω, δέχομαι, δίδωμι, ἐγκεντρίζω, ἐκβάλλω, ἐκπέμπω, ἐκχέω, ἐμβάπτω, ἐξαποστέλλω, καθίημι, μεταπέμπομαι, παρακύπτω, πέμπω, χαλάω; s. these entries. ἐμπίπτειν εἰς τοὺς λῃστάς fall among robbers Lk 10:36. εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mk 4:7; εἰς τ. λαόν Ac 4:17 et al., where the transl. depends on the verb in question. πνεύματος ἁγίου … ἀποσταλέντος εἰς αὐτήν (Μαρίαν) sent into her AcPlCor 2:5; cp. 2:10 ἔπεμψεν εἰς τοὺς προφήτας into the prophets; 2:14 κατέπεμψε … εἰς Μαρίαν.—ἔστη εἰς τὸ κριτήριον she stood before the tribunal GJs 15:2 (difft. J 20:19, 26, s. 1aβ).
    of direction toward something without ref. to bodily motion.
    α. w. verbs of looking (fr. Od. 10, 37; Il. 3, 364; LXX) ἀναβλέπειν εἴς τι look up toward someth. (2 Macc 7:28; Sus 35 Theod.) Mk 6:41; Lk 9:16; Ac 22:13; cp. ἀτενίζω, βλέπω, ἐμβλέπω, ὁράω (Just., D. 112, 1).—ἐπαίρειν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς εἴς τινα raise one’s eyes toward someone Lk 6:20.
    β. after verbs of saying, teaching, proclaiming, preaching, etc. (Trag.; Hdt. 8:26, 3; Thu. 1, 72, 2; 5, 45, 1 and many later wr., incl. LXX) λαλεῖν εἰς τ. κόσμον say to the world J 8:26. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον εἰς ὅλον τ. κόσμον the gospel in the whole world Mk 14:9. εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 13:10; Lk 24:47. εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Th 2:9. εὐαγγελίζεσθαι εἴς τινα 2 Cor 10:16; 1 Pt 1:25; γνωρίζειν Ro 16:26. ἀπαγγέλλειν τι εἴς τινα Mk 5:14; Lk 8:34. διαμαρτύρεσθαι εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ, μαρτυρεῖν εἰς Ῥώμην bear witness in Jerusalem, Rome Ac 23:11. ἵνα εἰς Νινευὴ μὴ κηρύξῃ AcPlCor 2:29. In these and similar cases εἰς approaches ἐν in mng.; s. 1aδ.
    γ. The same is true of βαπτίζεσθαι εἰς τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mk 1:9 and νίπτεσθαι εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν J 9:7; these expr. look like exx. of the interchange of εἰς and ἐν, but were orig. formed on the analogy of X., Cyr. 1, 3, 5 ἀποκαθαίρει τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὰ χειρόμακτρα= lit. ‘into the towels’; cp. Epict. 3, 22, 71 ἵνʼ αὐτὸ (sc. τὸ παιδίον) λούσῃ εἰς σκάφην; Alciphron, Ep. 3, 7, 1; Athen. 10, 438e.
    extension in time, to, until, on
    w. indication of specific time
    α. up to which someth. continues εἰς τέλος to the end (Epict. 1, 7, 17) Mt 10:22; 24:13; Mk 13:13. εἰς ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν until that day 2 Ti 1:12 (Ath. 2, 1 εἰς … τὴν σήμερον ἡμέραν). εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ Phil 1:10. εἰς Χριστόν until the coming of the Messiah Gal 3:24.
    β. for or on which someth. happens μεριμνᾶν εἰς τὴν αὔριον be anxious for tomorrow Mt 6:34; cp. Hs 6, 5, 3; εἰς τὸ μέλλον for the future 1 Ti 6:19. εἰς τὸ μεταξὺ σάββατον on the next Sabbath Ac 13:42. εἰς ἡμέραν (UPZ 66, 5 [153 B.C.]) for the day Phil 2:16; cp. Eph 4:30; Rv 9:15.
    γ. at which someth. takes place (Appian, Mithrid. 74 §321 ἐς ἑσπέραν=in the evening; Epict. 4, 10, 31 αὔριον ἢ εἰς τὴν τρίτην; En 1:1 οἵτινες ἔσονται εἰς ἡμέραν ἀνάγκης) εἰς τὸν καιρὸν αὐτῶν in their time Lk 1:20; εἰς τὸ μέλλον in the future 13:9. εἰς τέλος in the end, finally (Hdt. 3, 403; Gen 46:4; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 18, 2) 18:5 (B-D-F §207, 3 prefers mng. 3 below and ὑπωπιάζω 3; s. also Mlt-Turner 266). εἰς τὸ πάλιν=πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2; s. Schmid I 167; II 129; III 282; IV 455; 625. εἰς ταχεῖαν soon AcPlCor 2:3.
    to indicate duration of time for, throughout (Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 16 Jac. εἰς νύκτα; Arrian, Anab. 4, 30, 1 ἐς τρεῖς ἡμέρας; Just., D. 2, 5 εἰς μακρὰν for a long time) εἰς ἔτη πολλά for many years Lk 12:19. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας (αἰών 1b) forever Mt 21:19; Mk 3:29; 11:14; Lk 1:33; J 8:35 and oft. εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος to the day of eternity 2 Pt 3:18. εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γενεάς for generation after generation Lk 1:50. εἰς τὸ διηνεκές forever Hb 7:3; 10:1, 12, 14 (cp. Thu. 2, 64, 3 ἐς ἀί̈διον).
    marker of degree, up to: εἰς τέλος completely, fully, absolutely (s. Just, A I, 44, 12 and on τέλος 2bγ) 1 Th 2:16; B 4:7; 19:11; Hv 3, 7, 2; m 12, 2, 3; Hs 8, 6, 4; 8, 8, 5; 8, 9, 3.—J 13:1 combines in εἰς τέλος the mngs. to the end (s. 2aα above) and to the uttermost (cp. Appian, Mithrid. 58 §239 ἡμῶν ἀμυναμένων ἤδη καὶ ἀμυνουμένων ἐς τέλος=we have defended ourselves up to now and will defend ourselves ἐς τέλος). εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 2 Cor 10:13, 15 (cp. PVat A 12=Witkowski 36, 12 [168 B.C.] εἰς τὰ ἔσχατα). εἰς περισσείαν 10:15. εἰς ὑπερβολήν (Eur., Hipp. 939; Aeschin., F. Leg. 4) 4:17. εἰς τὸ παντελές (q.v. 2) Lk 13:11; Hb 7:25 (Tat. 6, 1).
    marker of goals involving affective/abstract/suitability aspects, into, to
    of entry into a state of being w. verbs of going, coming, leading, etc., used in a fig. sense: ἀπέρχεσθαι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον Mt 25:46 (cp. Sir 41:10). εἰσφέρειν εἰς πειρασμόν 6:13. πορεύεσθαι εἰς θάνατον Lk 22:33. ὑπάγειν εἰς ἀπώλειαν Rv 17:8, 11. βάλλειν εἰς θλῖψιν 2:22. παραδιδόναι εἰς θλῖψιν Mt 24:9; cp. 2 Cor 4:11; Lk 24:20. συγκλείειν εἰς ἀπείθειαν Ro 11:32. ἐμπίπτειν εἰς κρίμα 1 Ti 3:6f; cp. 6:9 (and Ath. 24, 5 εἰς ἐπιθυμίαν πεσόντες παρθένων). ἄγειν εἰς μετάνοιαν Ro 2:4; cp. Hb 2:10 εἰς δόξαν. (Just., A I, 10, 4 εἰς πίστιν; 42, 11 εἰς ἐπίστασιν καὶ ἀνάμνησιν.) αἰχμαλωτίζειν εἰς ὑπακοήν 2 Cor 10:5. ἀνακαινίζειν εἰς μετάνοιαν Hb 6:6; cp. 2:10. Sim. ἀπάγω, ἀποβαίνω, εἰσέρχομαι, εἰσφέρω, ἐκβάλλω, ἐλευθερόω, ἐπιστρέφω, κατευθύνω, μεταβαίνω, ὁδηγέω et al.; s. these entries.
    of change from one state to another w. verbs of changing: στρέφειν (Esth 4:17h; 1 Macc 1:39), μεταστρέφειν (Sir 11:31; 1 Macc 9:41; 3 Macc 6:22) τι εἴς τι Rv 11:6; Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); Js 4:9. μεταλλάσσειν Ro 1:26. μετασχηματίζεσθαι (q.v. 2) 2 Cor 11:13f; μετατίθεσθαι εἰς turn away to Gal 1:6.
    of actions or feelings directed in someone’s direction in hostile or friendly sense (Thu. 1, 38; 66; 130; X., Cyr. 1, 3, 5; Paus. 7, 9, 3; 7, 10, 2; Aelian, VH 11, 10).
    α. in a hostile sense (Arrian, Anab. 1, 1, 4; PEleph 1, 9 [311/310 B.C.] κακοτεχνεῖν εἰς Δημητρίαν; UPZ 170b, 47 [127 B.C.]): ἁμαρτάνειν εἴς τινα (Herodian 7, 9, 11; EpJer 12; Jdth 5:20; 11:10) sin against someone Lk 15:18, 21. βλασφημεῖν εἴς τινα (Bel 8 Theod.; Just., D. 122, 2) defame someone Mk 3:29; Lk 12:10; 22:65; θαρρεῖν εἴς τινα 2 Cor 10:1. ψεύδεσθαι εἴς τινα (Sus 55; 59 Theod.) Col 3:9. Also w. nouns and adj. (Paus. 7, 8, 4; PFay 12, 7 [c. 103 B.C.] ἀδικήματα εἴς με; En 97:7 μνημόσυνον εἰς ὑμᾶς κακόν) Ac 6:11; 23:30; Ro 8:7.
    β. in a friendly sense: μακροθυμεῖν 2 Pt 3:9. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Ro 12:16. So also πιστεύειν εἴς τινα trust or believe in someone Mt 18:6; Mk 9:42 and oft. (s. πιστεύω 1aε). Also w. nouns (OGI 49, 10 [III B.C.] φιλοτιμία εἰς; 51, 4; UPZ 22, 18 [162 B.C.]; 39, 5 εἰς τὸ θεῖον εὐσέβεια; 2 Macc 9:26 εὔνοια; Tat. 16:2 τῆς εἰς αὐτοὺς [δαίμονας] θρησκείας) ἀγάπη Ro 5:8; 2 Cor 2:4, 8; Col 1:4; 1 Th 3:12. ἐλπίς (2 Macc 9:20; Synes., Ep. 104 p. 264a εἰς τὸν κομήτην ἐ.) Ac 24:15. κοινωνία Phil 1:5 (Tat. 18, 2); πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22. δύναμις Eph 1:19. πίστις (Jos., Ant. 16, 48; 18, 334) Ac 20:21; 24:24; 26:18; Col 2:5; and adj. φιλόξενος 1 Pt 4:9; χρηστός Eph 4:32. διακονία Ro 15:31 (cp. the v.l. Ac 12:25 and s. JDupont, NovT 1, ’56, 275–303); 2 Cor 8:4. The context of 1 Pt 1:11 suggests consolation of Christians for the sufferings they endure in a hostile environment, hence REB: sufferings in Christ’s cause; for εἰς Χρ. construed genitivally (UPZ 180a II, 2 [113 B.C.] χωρὶς τοῦ εἰς αὐτὴν οἴκου; PTebt 16:9f contains a restoration of εἰς) s. NRSV ‘sufferings destined for Christ’ (for a parallel expr. in a hostile sense cp. Polyb. 1, 7, 12 τῆς εἰς ἐκείνους τιμωρίας; 1, 69, 7; 38, 1 [4], 13; s. [s.v. ἀνά beg.] Kuhring 13; Rudberg 201).
    w. the vocation, use, or end indicated for, as: αἱρέομαι εἴς τι 2 Th 2:13. ἀφορίζω Ro 1:1; Ac 13:2. προγράφω Ro 15:4; Jd 4. ἀποστέλλω Hb 1:14. πέμπω Phil 4:16; 1 Th 3:2, 5. ποιῶ τι εἰς 1 Cor 10:31; 11:24. S. also under κεῖμαι, προορίζω, τάσσω, τίθημι.—εἰμὶ εἴς τι serve as someth. (s. εἰμί 6; also ins 134, 33ff fr. the Delphinion at Miletus [I A.D.] 1914; s. Dssm., LO 97, 1 [LAE 123]; Ar. 5, 1 ὕδωρ … εἰς χρῆσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων γέγονε) 1 Cor 14:22; for destruction Col 2:22; as a testimony Js 5:3. Used w. a noun σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἀτιμίαν a vessel meant for honorable, dishonorable use Ro 9:21; cp. vs. 22f; 2 Ti 2:20f; φύλλα τοῦ ξύλου εἰς θεραπείαν Rv 22:2. φῶς εἰς ἀποκάλυψιν a light serving as a revelation Lk 2:32. θεράπων εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν λαληθησομένων a servant to bear witness to what would be said Hb 3:5. (Cp. Just., A I, 66, 1 τὸ … εἰς ἀναγέννησιν λουτρόν). W. acc. of pers. (Just., A II, 12, 4 συκοφαντίᾳ τῇ εἰς ἡμᾶς; Tat. 17, 3 τὴν εἰς τοὺς μεμηνότας βοήθειαν) ἡ εἰς ὑμᾶς χάρις the grace meant for you 1 Pt 1:10. διδόναι εἴς τι pay out for someth., money for a field Mt 27:10.
    w. the result of an action or condition indicated into, to, so that: αὐξάνειν εἰς ναόν grow into a temple Eph 2:21. πληροῦσθαι εἴς τι 3:19. λυπηθῆναι εἰς μετάνοιαν be grieved so that repentance takes place 2 Cor 7:9. Of prayer ἀναβαίνειν εἰς μνημόσυνον Ac 10:4. ὁμολογεῖν εἰς σωτηρίαν confess to salvation = so as to receive salvation Ro 10:10; cp. 1:16; 1 Pt 2:2; εἰς ἔπαινον κτλ. to praise etc. 1 Pt 1:7; εἰς βοήθειαν (1 Ch 12:17; Jdth 6:21; JosAs 23:4) Hb 4:16; cp. 10:39; Rv 13:3; Ro 6:16; 8:15; 13:4, 14; 1 Cor 11:34; 2 Cor 2:16 al.; εἰς κενόν (s. κενός 3) 2 Cor 6:1; Gal 2:2; Phil 2:16; 1 Th 3:5. σχίζειν εἰς δύο tear in two Mt 27:51; Mk 15:38. Cp. GPt 5:20 (cp. Polyb. 2, 16, 11; Lucian, Symp. 44, Tox. 54; 1 Km 15:29; Tob 5:3 S; 1 Macc 9:11; Ath. 18, 3 ᾠὸν … εἰς δύο ἐρράγη). W. subst. inf. foll. so that Ro 1:20; 3:26; 4:18; 6:12; 7:4; 1 Th 3:13; 2 Th 2:10f; Hb 11:3 al.
    to denote purpose in order to, to (Appian, Liby. 101 §476 ἐς ἔκπληξιν=in order to frighten; Just., A I, 21, 4 εἰς προτροπήν ‘to spur on’) εἰς ἄγραν in order to catch someth. Lk 5:4. εἰς ἀπάντησιν, συνάντησιν, ὑπάντησίν τινι (s. these 3 entries) to meet someone, toward someone Mt 8:34; 25:1; J 12:13. εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς as a witness, i.e. proof, to them Mt 8:4; 10:18; 24:14 al. εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν for forgiveness of sins, so that sins might be forgiven Mt 26:28; cp. Mk 1:4; Lk 3:3; Ac 2:38. εἰς μνημόσυνόν τινος in memory of someone Mt 26:13; Mk 14:9; cp. Lk 22:19 al. (εἰς μνημόσυνον En 99:3). εἰς ὅ for which purpose (Hdt. 2, 103, 1) Col 1:29; otherw. 2 Th 1:11 with this in view; εἰς τί; why? (Wsd 4:17; Sir 39:16, 21) Mt 14:31; Mk 14:4; 15:34; Hm 2:5; D 1:5. εἰς τοῦτο for this reason or purpose Mk 1:38; Lk 4:43 v.l.; J 18:37; Ac 9:21; 26:16; Ro 9:17; 14:9; 2 Cor 2:9; 1J 3:8; Hs 1:9 (Just., A I, 13, 3). εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο for this very reason 2 Cor 5:5; Eph 6:22; Col 4:8. W. subst. inf. foll. (X., Ages. 9, 3, Mem. 3, 6, 2; Just., A I, 9, 5) in order to (oft. LXX; neg. μή in order not to; s. B-D-F §402, 2) Mt 20:19; 26:2; 27:31; Mk 14:55 and oft.—εἰς ὁδόν for the journey 6:8.
    As in Mod. Gk., it is used for the dat., esp. the dat. of advantage, but also= for in general (X., An. 3, 3, 19 τ. ἵππους εἰς ἱππέας κατασκευάσωμεν; Lycurg. 85 διεκαρτέρουν εἰς τ. πατρίδα; UPZ 180a I, 7 [113 B.C.] τὸν εἰς Τάγην οἶκον ᾠκοδομημένον; BGU 37, 4f [51 A.D.] ξύλα εἰς τοὺς ἐλαιῶνάς μου wood for my olive orchards; PLond I, 43, 9 p. 48 [II B.C.]; PTebt 5, 77; POxy 37 I, 9; EpJer 9; Sir 37:7, cp. vs. 8; Jdth 14:2; Bel 3 Theod., vs. 22 LXX) εἰς πάντα τ. λαόν Lk 9:13; cp. 3J 5. εἰς ἡμᾶς Eph 1:19; cp. Col 1:25; 1 Th 4:10; Ro 10:12. χρείαν ἔχειν εἰς τ. ἑορτήν J 13:29; cp. Mk 8:19f; Gal 2:8; 1 Th 2:9; 5:15 et al.—εἰς is commonly used in speaking of the person for whom a payment etc. is made (Dssm., B 113–15; NB 23 [BS 117f; 194f]) 1 Cor 16:1; 2 Cor 8:4; 9:1, 13; Ro 15:26; Ac 24:17. εἰς λόγον τινός in an account for someth. (POxy 275, 19; 21 [66 A.D.]; 496, 10; 530, 15) Phil 4:15; cp. vs. 17. εἰς Χριστόν Phlm 6 prob. in honor of Christ (Tetrast. Iamb. 1, 7, 4 p. 266 εἰς θεούς; Pla., Lysis 205d ᾂδεις εἰς σαυτὸν ἐγκώμιον; Ps.-Pla., Minos 319c; Athen. 15, 667c; Synes., Ep. 75 p. 222b).
    marker of a specific point of reference, for, to, with respect to, with reference to (Arrian, Anab. 6, 26, 3 τοῦτο τὸ ἔργον εἰς καρτερίαν ἐπαινῶ Ἀλεξάνδρου=I praise this deed with regard to Alexander’s endurance; Ath. 31, 1 οὐδὲν χείρους εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον ‘none the worse in respect to excellence’) εὔθετος εἴς τι fit, suitable for someth. Lk 14:35; also εὔχρηστος 2 Ti 4:11. ἡτοιμασμένος ready for 2:21. εὐκαιρέω εἴς τι Ac 17:21. ἱκανόω Col 1:12. ἰσχύω Mt 5:13. περισσεύω 2 Cor 9:8. συνεργέω Ro 8:28. τοῦτο οὐκ εἰς ταύτας τ. ἡμέρας λέγω I say this not with reference to these days Hs 9, 26, 6.—After the verbs ἀπορέομαι, διακρίνομαι, καυχάομαι, παρρησίαν ἔχω, s. these entries. After the adj. ἄκαρπος, ἀκέραιος, βραδύς, σοφός, συνεργός, ὑπήκοος, φρόνιμος, s. these entries. W. acc. of pers. ἀσθενεῖν εἴς τινα be weak toward someone 2 Cor 13:3. εὐδοκεῖν 2 Pt 1:17. λέγειν εἴς τινα say w. reference to someone (Diod S 11, 50, 4; Just., D. 77, 1 εἰς Χριστὸν … εἰρῆσθαι) Ac 2:25.—On Ro 6:17 s. παραδίδωμι 1b end. δέχομαί τινα εἰς ὄνομά τινος Mt 10:41f; s. ὄνομα 1dγא.
    marker of a guarantee, by ὀμνύναι εἴς τι swear by someth. Mt 5:35 (cp. PGiss 66, 8f [early II A.D.] ἐρωτῶ εἰς τὴν τ. θεῶν εὐσέβειαν; but the sole use of εἰς in a series of datives w. ἐν may reflect bilingualism; for prob. Hb. perspective, s. M’Neile, comm. ad loc).
    distributive marker: w. numbers εἰς is distributive ‘-fold’ (cp. ἐστρίς ‘until three times’ Pind., O. 2, 68; GDI IV p. 884, n62, 36 [IV B.C.]) Mk 4:8 v.l. (otherw. ἐς τετρακοσίους, ἐς ὀγδοήκοντα about 400, about 80: Arrian, Anab. 5, 15, 2; 6, 2, 4; 7, 20, 3).
    The predicate nom. and the predicate acc. are somet. replaced by εἰς w. acc. under Semitic influence, which has strengthened Gk. tendencies in the same direction:
    predicate nom.
    α. w. γίνεσθαι (PFay 119, 34 [100 A.D.] ἵνα μὴ εἰς ψωμίον γένηται; Wsd 14:11; 1 Macc 1:36; 10:70; Jdth 5:10, 18 al.) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:22). ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον Lk 13:19; cp. J 16:20; Ac 5:36; Rv 8:11; 16:19.
    β. w. εἶναι (Bar 2:23; Jdth 5:21, 24; Sir 31:10 et al.) Mt 19:5 (Gen 2:24); Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5; 8:10 (in the last 3 pass. OT expressions are also reproduced). Not fr. the OT: 1J 5:8.
    γ. λογίζεσθαι εἰς (Wsd 2:16; 1 Macc 2:52) Ro 4:3 (Gen 15:6); cp. 2:26; 9:8. λ. εἰς οὐθέν (Is 40:17; Wsd 3:17; cp. 9:6) Ac 19:27.
    predicate acc. (Heliod. 6, 14, 1 τ. πήραν εἰς καθέδραν ποιησαμένη=she used the knapsack as a seat; Vett. Val. 59, 7; 1 Macc 10:54; 11:62; Jdth 5:11 al.; JosAs 13:12 παράθου με αὐτῷ εἰς παιδίσκην) ἐγείρειν τινὰ εἰς βασιλέα Ac 13:22 (cp. 1 Km 13:14). ἀνατρέφεσθαί τινα εἰς υἱόν 7:21 (cp. Ex 2:10). τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν 13:47 (cp. Is 49:6). Cp. Mt 21:46; 1 Cl 42:4.—B-D-F §145; 157, 5; Rdm.2 20f; Mlt. 71f; Mlt-H. 462. Johannessohn, Kasus 4f.
    marker of instrumentality, by, with (Arrian, Anab. 5, 12, 3 ἐς ἀκρίβειαν=with care; Vi. Aesopi I G 7 P. νικᾶν εἰς εὐσέβειαν πάντα ψόγον=overcome all censure with piety) εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων Ac 7:53 (=ἐν διαταγαῖς, B-D-F §206, 1). Sim. ὕπαγε εἰς εἰρήνην (1 Km 1:17) Mk 5:34; Lk 7:50; 8:48 (=ἐν εἰρήνῃ). Mlt-Turner 254f.
    Other uses of εἰς
    at, in the face of μετανοεῖν εἰς τὸ κήρυγμα repent at the proclamation Mt 12:41; Lk 11:32; cp. Ro 4:20 and perh. Mt 3:11. JMantey, JBL 70, ’51, 45–48, 309–11 argues for a causal use here because of the proclam., with reff.; against him RMarcus, ibid. 129f; 71, ’52, 43f; JDavis, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 80–88.
    for βαπτίζω εἰς s. βαπτίζω 2c.
    μένειν εἰς remain with (PFay 111, 12 [95/96 A.D.]) so perh. J 6:27.
    in pregnant constructions: σῴζειν εἰς bring safely into 2 Ti 4:18 (cp. X., An. 6, 4, 8; Diod S 2, 48; Cebes 27; SIG 521, 26 [III B.C.], OGI 56, 11; 4 Macc 15:3). διασῴζειν 1 Pt 3:20 (cp. Gen 19:19). μισθοῦσθαι ἐργάτας εἰς τ. ἀμπελῶνα to go into the vineyard Mt 20:1. ἐλευθεροῦσθαι εἰς be freed and come to Ro 8:21. ἀποδιδόναι τινὰ εἰς Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:9 (cp. Gen 37:28). ἔνοχος εἰς τ. γέενναν Mt 5:22; cp. 10:9; Mk 6:8; J 20:7.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰς

  • 6 εἶπον

    εἶπον ([tense] pres. ἔπω is used by Nic.Al. 429, 490, etc., but the [tense] pres. in use is φημί, λέγω, ἀγορεύω (v. infr. IV), the [tense] fut. ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, the [tense] pf. εἴρηκα), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr.
    A

    ἔειπον Il.1.552

    , al., Pi.O.4.25; subj. εἴπω ([dialect] Ep.

    εἴπωμι Od.22.392

    , - ῃσθα 11.224, - ῃσι Il.7.87); opt. εἴποιμι; inf. εἰπεῖν, [dialect] Ep. - έμεναι, -έμεν, 7.375, 9.688, [dialect] Dor. εἴπην (v. infr.); part. εἰπών: also [tense] aor. 1 εἶπα (

    ἔειπα Emp.17.15

    , Theoc.22.153), ὅπερ εἶπα as I said, Satyr.Vit.Eur.Fr.39xvii 14, mostly in [dialect] Ion. Prose, also Men. Pk. 128, Herod.3.26, UPZ62.14 (ii B. C.), and the [ per.] 2nd persons ind. and imper. of this form are preferred in [dialect] Att., [ per.] 2sg. ind.

    εἶπας Il.1.106

    , 108, etc.; imper. εἶπον (on the accent v. Hdn.Gr.1.460) Simon.154, Pl.Men. 71d, Men.891, Theoc.14.11, εἰπάτω (

    ἀν-ειπάτω IG22.1186.19

    (iv B.C.), but ἀν-ειπέτω ib.1247.13 (iii B.C.)), - ατον, -ατε; [ per.] 3pl.

    εἶπαν SIG 333.3

    (Samos, iv B.C.), later

    εἴπασαν IG7.2225.51

    ([place name] Thisbe); part.

    εἴπας Philem.42

    , [dialect] Aeol.

    εἴπαις Pi.O.8.46

    , cf. Ael.Dion.Fr. 156; in compds. [voice] Med. ἀπείπασθαι (q.v.), διείπασθαι (q.v.), but never in good [dialect] Att.: (redupl. [tense] aor. 2 from ϝεπ- 'say'; ϝείπην only cj. in Alc.55, Sapph. 28.2;

    ϝεῖπαι Leg.Gort.8.15

    ; with ἔ- (ϝ) ειπον cf. Skt. avocam, redupl. [tense] aor. of vac- 'say'; cf. ἔπος):—speak, say,

    ὣς εἰπών Il.1.68

    , etc.;

    τινί 17.692

    , etc.;

    εἰς ἅπαντας E.Hec. 303

    ; εἰπεῖν ἔν τισιν or μετά τισιν speak among a number, Il.10.445, 3.85, etc.: c. acc. cogn., ἔπος, μῦθον, θεοπρόπιον, οὐνόματα, etc., 3.204, 1.552,85, 17.260, etc.;

    τινί τι Od.1.169

    , al.; τι Alc., Sapph. ll. cc., etc.; τι ἔς or πρός τινα, S.Tr. 487, Aj. 292; εἰπεῖν περί τινος, ἀμφί τινι, Od.15.347, 14.364: c. gen., πατρός τε καὶ υἱέος of them, 11.174; εἰπεῖν ὅτι or ὡς to say that.., Il.17.655, Od.22.373, etc.: but also c. inf., Hdt.2.30, Th.7.35, Pl.Grg. 473a, etc. b. recite,

    ἔπη Id. Ion 535b

    .
    2 in parenthesis, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν so to say, limiting a general statement, A.Pers. 714, etc.; speaking loosely, opp. ὄντως, Pl.Lg. 656e; opp. ἀκριβεῖ λόγῳ, Id.R. 341b;

    ὡς εἰπεῖν Th.3.38

    , al., Pl.Phdr. 258e, al.;

    ὡς ἀξίως εἰπεῖν Arist.PA 651b36

    : without

    ὡς, οὐ πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν Hdt.1.61

    ;

    ἐς τὸ ἀκριβὲς εἰπεῖν Th.6.82

    ;

    σχεδὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Sph. 237c

    :

    καθόλου εἰπεῖν Arist.Cat. 12a27

    ;

    ἡ ἁπλῶς εἰπεῖν ἀπόδειξις Id.APo. 75b23

    ; τὸ ξύμπαν εἶπαι, εἰπεῖν, Hdt.7.143, Th.1.138.
    3 εἴποι τις as one might say, dub. l. in Plb.15.35.1;

    ὥσπερ εἴποι τις Ar.Av. 180

    (s.v.l.);

    ὡς εἴποι τις D.Chr.64.5

    (s.v.l.).
    II c. acc. pers., address, accost one, Il.12.210, etc.
    2 name, mention, ib.1.90, etc.
    3 call one so and so,

    πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.334

    , cf. S.OC43, E.Med. 465, etc.
    4 c. dupl. acc. pers. et rei, tell or proclaim so of one, Il.6.479 (where ἀνιόντα depends on εἴποι) ; εἰπεῖν τινα ὅτι .. Pi.O.14.22;

    ἀτάσθαλόν τι εἰ. τινά Od.22.314

    ;

    κακὰ εἰ. τινά Ar.Ach. 649

    ;

    μηδὲν φλαῦρον εἰ. τ. Id.Nu. 834

    ;

    ἐῢ εἰ. τινά Od.1.302

    ; εἰ. τεθνεῶτ' Ὀρέστην speak of him as dead, A.Ch. 682.
    5 celebrate, of poets,

    Αἴαντος βίαν AP7.2.6

    (Antip. Sid.).
    III c. dat. pers. et inf., order or command one to.., Od. 15.76, 22.262, etc.; also εἰπεῖν πρός τινα, c. inf., 16.151: c. acc. et inf.,

    εἶπον τὰς παῖδας δεῦρ' ἄγειν τινά S.OC 932

    , cf. Pl.Phd. 59e, Herod. 6.26: folld. by ἵνα, freq. in NT, Ev.Matt.4.3, al.
    IV propose, move a measure in the assembly,

    εἰπὼν τὰ βέλτιστα D.3.12

    ; εἰπεῖν τὰ δέοντα ib.15;

    εἶπε ψήφισμα Id.24.11

    : freq. as a formal prefix to decrees and laws,

    Λάχης εἶπε Th.4.118

    , cf.IG12.24, al.; cf. ἀγορεύω.
    V plead,

    δίκην Il.18.508

    ;

    δικίδιον Ar.Eq. 347

    .
    VII imper. εἰπέ sts. used in addressing several persons, Ar.Ach. 328, Av. 366, D.4.10.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἶπον

  • 7 λόγος

    λόγος, ου, ὁ (verbal noun of λέγω in the sense ‘pick’; Hom.+).
    a communication whereby the mind finds expression, word
    of utterance, chiefly oral.
    α. as expression, word (oratorical ability plus exceptional performance were distinguishing marks in Hellenic society, hence the frequent association of λ. and ἔργον ‘deed’; a sim. formulation as early as Il. 9, 443 μύθων τε ῥητῆρʼ ἔμεναι πρηκτῆρά τε ἔργων; Polystrat. p. 33 μὴ λόγῳ μόνον ἀλλʼ ἔργω; Just., A II, 4, 2 ἢ λόγῳ ἢ ἔργῳ and D. 35, 7 λόγον ἢ πρᾶξιν) δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ κ. λόγῳ, i.e. an exceptional personage Lk 24:19; pl. of Moses Ac 7:22 (the contrast expressed w. a verb Choix 20, 6–8 ποιεῖ ἀγαθὸν ὄτι δύναται καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ of Apollordorus, a benefactor in Cyzicus, a flourishing city in Phrygia; sim. New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 8f πολιτευόμενος … λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ; cp. IKourion 32, 8; without contrast Diod S 13, 101, 3 ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς; for sim. constructions using λέγω and πράσσω s. Danker, Benefactor 339–43). Cp. Ro 15:18; 2 Cor 10:11; Col 3:17; 2 Th 2:17; Hb 13:21 v.l.; 1J 3:18 (cp. Theognis 1, 87f Diehl3 μή μʼ ἔπεσιν μὲν στέργε κτλ.—For the contrast λόγῳ … ἀληθείᾳ cp. Diod S 13, 4, 1). In contrast to a sinful deed we also have the λόγος ἁμαρτίας sinful word Judaicon 172, 9. W. γνῶσις: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5. ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ, ἀλλʼ οὐ τῇ γνώσει 2 Cor 11:6. (Opp. δύναμις ‘revelation of power’) 1 Cor 4:19, 20. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Th 1:5 (cp. Ar. 13, 7 of mythical accounts οὐδέν εἰσιν εἰ μὴ μόνον λόγοι ‘they’re nothing but words’). W. ἐπιστολή: 2 Th 2:2, 15. W. ἀναστροφή: 1 Ti 4:12; 1 Pt 3:1b. Opp. ‘be silent’: IRo 2:1.—μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ just say the word Mt 8:8; cp. Lk 7:7 (Ath. 17, 1 ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; 29, 2; Phalaris, Ep. 121, 1 λόγῳ λέγειν; cp. schol. on Pla. 341a ἐν λόγῳ μόνον εἰπεῖν). οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον no one was able to answer him a (single) word Mt 22:46; cp. 15:23 (cp. TestAbr A 16 p. 98, 11 [Stone p. 44] οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λόγον).— The (mighty) word (of one who performs miracles) ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Mt 8:16 (a rare use of λ. as ‘single utterance’, s. L-S-J-M s.v. VII).—διὰ λόγου by word of mouth (opp. ‘by letter’) Ac 15:27.—In the textually uncertain pass. Ac 20:24 the text as it stands in N., οὐδενὸς λόγου (v.l. λόγον) ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν, may well mean: I do not consider my life worth a single word (cp. λόγου ἄξιον [ἄξιος 1a] and our ‘worth mention’; s. Conzelmann ad loc.).
    β. The expression may take on a variety of formulations or topical nuances: what you say Mt 5:37; statement (PGM 4, 334) Lk 20:20; question (Sext. Emp., Math. 8, 295; 9, 133; Diog. L. 2, 116) ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς λόγον I will ask you a question (cp. TestJob 36:5; GrBar 5:1; ApcSed 13:6; Jos., Ant. 12, 99) Mt 21:24; cp. Mk 11:29; Lk 20:3; prayer (PGM 1, 25; 4, 90; 179; 230 al.; 5, 180; 196 al.) Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39. ἡγούμενος τοῦ λ. principal speaker Ac 14:12. W. epexeget. gen. λ. παρακλήσεως 13:15. W. κήρυγμα our manner of presentation and our proclamation 1 Cor 2:4a (but s. comm.). (W. διδασκαλία) preaching 1 Ti 5:17; prophecy (Biogr. p. 364 [Pythia]) J 2:22; 18:32. Command (Aeschyl., Pers. 363) Lk 4:36; 2 Pt 3:5, 7; via a letter 2 Th 3:14. Report, story (X., An. 1, 4, 7; Diod S 3, 40, 9; 19, 110, 1 λ. διαδιδόναι=spread a report; Appian, Iber. 80 §346, Maced. 4 §1 [both=rumor]; Diod S 32, 15, 3 ἦλθεν ὁ λ. ἐπί τινα=the report came to someone; Arrian, Anab. 7, 22, 1 λόγος λέγεται τοιόσδε=a story is told like this, Ind. 9, 2; Diod S 3, 18, 3 λ.=story, account; Jos., Ant. 19, 132; Tat. 27, 2 τοῦ καθʼ Ἡρακλέα λόγου) Mt 28:15; Mk 1:45; Lk 5:15 (λ. περί τινος as X., An. 6, 6, 13; Jos., Ant. 19, 127) 7:17; J 21:23. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τ. ἐκκλησίας the report came to the ears of the assembly in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. λόγον ἔχειν σοφίας have the appearance of wisdom, pass for wisdom Col 2:23 (cp. Pla., Epinomis 987b ἔχει λόγον; Demosth., C. Lept. 462 [20, 18] λόγον τινʼ ἔχον; but mng. 2f is possible). Proverb (Pla., Phdr. 17, 240c, Symp. 18, 195b, Gorg. 54, 499c, Leg. 6, 5, 757a; Socrat., Ep. 22, 1) J 4:37 (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 13, 7 ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ὁ λ. foll. by a proverb). Proclamation, instruction, teaching, message Lk 4:32; 10:39; J 4:41; 17:20; Ac 2:41; 4:4; 10:44; 20:7; 1 Cor 1:17; 2:1. In Ac18:15 ζητήματα περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου the sense appears to be someth. like this: controversial issues involving disputes about words and your way of life with λ. prob. referring to the presentation of controversial subjects, which in turn arouses heated ζητήματα debates. λόγος σοφίας proclamation of wisdom, speaking wisely 1 Cor 12:8a (Ps.-Phoc. 129 τῆς θεοπνεύστου σοφίης λ.); corresp. λ. γνώσεως vs. 8b. Cp. 14:9; 15:2; 2 Cor 1:18; 6:7; 10:10. λ. μαρτυρίας word of witness Rv 12:11. ὁ κατὰ τ. διδαχὴν πιστὸς λ. the message of faith, corresponding to the teaching Tit 1:9; the opp. 2 Ti 2:17. A speech (Aristot. p. 14b, 2; Diod S 40, 5a) διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ in a long speech Ac 15:32; cp. 20:2. λ. κολακείας flattering speech 1 Th 2:5. Speaking gener. 2 Cor 8:7; Eph 6:19; Col 4:6; D 2:5. ἐν λόγῳ πταίειν make a mistake in what one says Js 3:2.—Of God’s word, command, commission (LXX; ParJer 5:19 κατηχῆσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν λόγον; SyrBar 13:2; ApcSed 14:10; Just., D. 84, 2; Ael. Aristid. hears a ἱερὸς λ. at night fr. a god: 28, 116 K.=49, p. 529 D.; Sextus 24) ἠκυρώσατε τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 15:6 (v.l. νόμον, ἐντολήν); cp. Mk 7:13.—J 5:38; 8:55; 10:35; Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6). Of God’s promise Ro 9:6, 9 (but these two vss., and Gal 5:14 below, prob. fit better under 2a), 28 (Is 10:22f). Cp. Hb 2:2; 4:2 (s. ἀκοή 4b); 7:28; 12:19. For B 15:1 see 1aδ. The whole law (as the expr. εἴ τι ἑτέρα ἐντολή indicates not limited to a narrow list of commandments), acc. to Ro 13:9. In what is prob. a play on words (s. 2a and b), Gal 5:14 (s. 2a below) is summed up in the λόγος as expressed in Lev 19:18.—That which God has created ἁγιάζεται διὰ λόγου θεοῦ 1 Ti 4:5; in line w. the context, this hardly refers to God’s creative word (so SibOr 3, 20; PtK 2; πάντα γὰρ λόγῳ ποιήσας ὁ θεός Theoph. Ant. 2, 18 [144, 8]), but to table prayers which use biblical expressions. The divine word as judge of thoughts Hb 4:12. τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 17:17; cp. 19:9.—Of the divine revelation through Christ and his messengers (Just., A I, 61, 9 λόγον … παρὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐμάθομεν τοῦτον) θεὸς ἐφανέρωσεν τὸν λ. αὐτοῦ ἐν κηρύγματι Tit 1:3. δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λ. σου J 17:14; cp. vss. 6, 17; 1J 1:10; 2:14. ἵνα μὴ ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ βλασφημῆται Tit 2:5. The apostles and other preachers, w. ref. to the λόγος of God, are said to: λαλεῖν Ac 4:29, 31; 13:46; Phil 1:14; Hb 13:7; καταγγέλλειν Ac 13:5; 17:13; διδάσκειν 18:11; μαρτυρεῖν Rv 1:2. Of their hearers it is said: τὸν λ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούειν Ac 13:7; δέχεσθαι 8:14; 11:1. Of the λ. τοῦ θεοῦ itself we read: ηὔξανεν Ac 6:7; 12:24; 19:20; οὐ δέδεται 2 Ti 2:9. In these places and many others ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ is simply the Christian message, the gospel: Lk 5:1; 8:11, 21; 11:28 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 1, 20 μὴ μόνον ἀκουόντων ἀλλὰ πασχόντων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων=let the message have its effect on oneself); Ac 6:2 (s. καταλείπω 7c; for prob. commercial metaph. s. 2a below); 13:44 v.l. (for κυρίου); 16:32 v.l.; 1 Cor 14:36; 2 Cor 2:17; 4:2; Col 1:25; 1 Pt 1:23; Rv 1:9; 6:9; 20:4; IPhld 11:1. Cp. 1 Th 2:13ab; 1J 2:5.—Since this ‘divine word’ is brought to humanity through Christ, his word can be used in the same sense: ὁ λόγος μου J 5:24; cp. 8:31, 37, 43, 51f; 12:48; 14:23f; 15:3, 20b; Rv 3:8. ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Col 3:16; cp. Hb 6:1. ὁ λ. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 8:25; 12:24 v.l.; 13:44, 48f; 14:25 v.l.; 15:35, 36; 16:32 (cp. λ. θεοῦ); 19:10; 1 Th 1:8; 2 Th 3:1. Pl. Mk 8:38 (Lk 9:26); 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Lk 24:44; s. also 1aδ.—Or it is called simply ὁ λόγος=the ‘Word’, for no misunderstanding would be possible among Christians: Mt 13:20–23; Mk 2:2; 4:14–20, 33; 8:32 (s. 1aε below); 16:20; Lk 1:2; 8:12f, 15; Ac 6:4; 8:4; 10:36 (on the syntax s. FNeirynck, ETL 60, ’84, 118–23); 11:19; 14:25 (cp. λ. κυρίου above); 16:6; 17:11; 18:5; Gal 6:6; Phil 1:14; Col 4:3; 1 Th 1:6; 2 Ti 4:2; Js 1:21ff; 1 Pt 2:8; 3:1; 1J 2:7; AcPl Ha 7, 6 (so also Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 2, 3).—Somet. the ‘Word’ is more closely defined by a gen.: ὁ λ. τῆς βασιλείας the word of the reign/rule (of God) Mt 13:19. τῆς σωτηρίας Ac 13:26. τῆς καταλλαγῆς 2 Cor 5:19. τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. δικαιοσύνης (q.v. 3a) Hb 5:13. ζωῆς Phil 2:16. (τῆς) ἀληθείας (Theoph. Ant. 3, 4 [p. 212, 2]; cp. περὶ ἀληθείας Hippol., Ref. 10, 6, 1) Eph 1:13; Col 1:5; 2 Ti 2:15; Js 1:18; AcPl Ha 8, 8 (Just., D. 121, 2). τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) Ac 14:3; 20:32. (Differently the pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. χάριτος gracious words Lk 4:22; cp. Marcellinus, Vi. Thu. 57 Hude λόγοι εἰρωνείας.) ὁ λ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ac 15:7; ὁ τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ λ. MPol 10:1. In Rv 3:10 the gospel is described by the ‘One who has the key of David’ as ὁ λ. τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου my word of endurance (W-S. §30, 12c). λ. τῶν ὑ[πο]μονῶν AcPl Ha 6, 11. παρελάβετε τὸν λ. ὅτι AcPl Ha 8, 25.—The pastoral letters favor the expr. πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (sc. ἐστίν, and s. πιστός 1b) 1 Ti 1:15; 3:1; 4:9; 2 Ti 2:11; Tit 3:8; cp. Rv 21:5; 22:6. λ. ὑγιής sound preaching Tit 2:8; cp. the pl. ὑγιαίνοντες λόγοι 2 Ti 1:13 (on medicinal use of words for the mind or soul s. VLeinieks, The City of Dionysos ’96, 115–22, on Eur.).—The pl. is also used gener. of Christian teachings, the words of the gospel Lk 1:4 (s. κατηχέω 2a); 1 Th 4:18. οἱ λ. τῆς πίστεως 1 Ti 4:6. On λόγοι κυριακοί for λόγια κυριακά in the title of the Papias document s. ἐξήγησις 2.—JSchniewind, Die Begriffe Wort und Evangelium bei Pls, diss. Bonn 1910; RAsting (εὐαγγέλιον, end).
    γ. of an individual declaration or remark: assertion, declaration, speech ἀκούσαντες τὸν λ. when they heard the statement Mt 15:12; cp. 19:11, 22; 22:15; Mk 5:36. διὰ τοῦτον τὸν λ. because of this statement of yours 7:29 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 29 [Stone p. 38] τὸν λ. τοῦτον; ApcMos 25 εἰς τὸν λόγον σου κρινῶ σε). Cp. 10:22; 12:13; Lk 1:29; 22:61 v.l. (for ῥήματος); J 4:39, 50; 6:60; 7:36, 40 v.l.; 15:20a; 18:9; 19:8; Ac 6:5; 7:29; 20:38; 22:22; 1 Th 4:15. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου whoever utters a (defamatory) word against the Son of Humanity Mt 12:32 (λ. εἰπεῖν κατά τινος as Jos., Ant. 15, 81); cp. Lk 12:10. λόγος σαπρός unwholesome talk Eph 4:29. λόγον ποιεῖσθαι make a speech Ac 11:2 D (cp. Hyperid. 3, 20; Jos., Ant. 11, 86).
    δ. the pl. (οἱ) λόγοι is used, on the one hand, of words uttered on various occasions, of speeches or instruction given here and there by humans or transcendent beings (TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 19 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 4, 264; Just., D. 100, 3) ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου δικαιωθήσῃ (καταδικασθήσῃ) Mt 12:37ab; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 21:33; Ac 2:40; 7:22 (ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ. On the word-deed pair cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 6 the λόγοι and ἔργα of Diogenes; s. α above). οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten commandments (Ex 34:28; Dt 10:4; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 168, Decal. 32; Jos., Ant. 3, 138; cp. 91f; Did., Gen. 36, 10) B 15:1. Ac 15:24; 20:35; 1 Cor 2:4b, 13; 14:19ab; κενοὶ λ. Eph 5:6; AcPl Ox 6, 13 (cp. Aa 1, 241, 14); Dg 8:2; πλαστοὶ λ. 2 Pt 2:3. λ. πονηροί 3J 10.—Also of words and exprs. that form a unity, whether it be connected discourse (Jos., Ant. 15, 126; Just., A II, 12, 6, D. 11, 5; 81, 3 al.), a conversation, or parts of one and the same teaching, or expositions on the same subject (Diod S 16, 2, 3 μετέσχε τῶν Πυθαγορίων λόγων; Dio Chrys. 37 [54], 1; Ael. Aristid. 50, 55 K.=26 p. 519 D.: οἱ Πλάτωνος λόγοι; PsSol 17:43 [words of the Messiah]; AscIs 3:12 οἱ λόγοι τοῦ Βελχειρά) πᾶς ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:24; cp. vss. 26, 28; 10:14; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 10:24; Lk 1:20; 6:47; 9:28, 44. ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς he questioned him at some length 23:9. τίνες οἱ λ. οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε; what is this conversation that you are holding? 24:17; J 7:40 (s. γ); 10:19; J 14:24a; 19:13; Ac 2:22; 5:5, 24; 16:36; 2 Ti 4:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 46:7. λόγοις φθοριμαίοις AcPlCor 1:2.
    ε. the subject under discussion, matter, thing gener. (Theognis 1055 Diehl; Hdt. 8, 65 μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπῃς. Cp. Hebr. דָּבָר) τὸν λ. ἐκράτησαν they took up the subject Mk 9:10; cp. Mt. 21:24 (s. 1aβ beg.). οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ you have no share in this matter Ac 8:21. ἰδεῖν περὶ τ. λόγου τούτου look into this matter 15:6. ἔχειν πρός τινα λόγον have a complaint against someone (cp. Demosth. 35, 55 ἐμοὶ πρὸς τούτους ὁ λόγος; PIand 16, 3 δίκαιον λόγον ἔχει πρὸς σέ) 19:38. παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (2d is also prob.).—Perh. also Mk 8:32 he discussed the subject quite freely (but s. 1aβ above).
    of literary or oratorical productions: of the separate books of a work (Hdt. 5, 36 ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τ. λόγων; Pla., Parmen. 2, 127d ὁ πρῶτος λόγος; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 1 ὁ μὲν πρότερος λόγος ἦν ἡμῖν, ὦ Θεόδοτε, περὶ τοῦ …) treatise Ac 1:1 (s. on the prologue to Ac: AHilgenfeld, ZWT 41, 1898, 619ff; AGercke, Her 29, 1894, 373ff; RLaqueur, Her 46, 1911, 161ff; Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; JCreed, JTS 35, ’34, 176–82; Goodsp., Probs. 119–21). Παπίας … πέντε λόγους κυριακῶν λογίων ἔγραψεν Papias (11:1; cp. 3:1 e; 11:2; 12:2).—περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11. Hb is described as ὁ λ. τῆς παρακλήσεως a word of exhortation (in literary form) 13:22. Of writings that are part of Holy Scripture ὁ λ. Ἠσαί̈ου J 12:38. ὁ λ. ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γεγραμμένος 15:25; ὁ προφητικὸς λ. 2 Pt 1:19; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.); AcPl Ha 8, 27/BMM recto 35 (Just., D. 77, 2 al.). ὁ ἅγιος λ. the holy word 1 Cl 56:3. ὁ λ. ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 Cor 15:54 (Is 25:8 and Hos 13:14 follow). Pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. προφητῶν Ac 15:15. ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαί̈ου Lk 3:4 (Pla., 7th Epistle 335a πείθεσθαι ἀεὶ χρὴ τοῖς παλαιοῖς καὶ ἱεροῖς λόγοις; TestJob 1:1 βίβλος λόγων Ἰώβ; ParJer 9:32 v.l. τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν λόγων Ἱερεμίου; ApcEsdr 1:1 καὶ ἀποκάλυψις τοῦ … Ἐσδράμ; ApcSed prol.; Just., D. 72, 3f).—Of the content of Rv: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων τ. λόγους τῆς προφητείας 1:3. οἱ λόγοι (τ. προφητείας) τ. βιβλίου τούτου 22:7, 9f, 18f.
    computation, reckoning
    a formal accounting, esp. of one’s actions, and freq. with fig. extension of commercial terminology account, accounts, reckoning λόγον δοῦναι (Hdt. 8, 100; X., Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Diod S 3, 46, 4; SIG 1099, 16; BGU 164, 21; Jos., Ant. 16, 120; Just., D. 115, 6) give account, make an accounting ἕκαστος περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λόγον δώσει τ. θεῷ Ro 14:12. Also λ. ἀποδοῦναι abs. (Just., D. 116, 1 al.; Diod S 16, 56, 4; 19, 9, 4) Hb 13:17. τινί to someone (Diod S 16, 27, 4; Plut., Alcib. 7, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 2; SIG 631, 13 τᾷ πόλει; 2 Ch 34:28; Da 6:3 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 209) τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 Pt 4:5. τινὸς of someth. (SIG 1044, 46; 1105, 10 τοῦ ἀναλώματος; Jos., Ant. 19, 307) Lk 16:2 (here λ. w. the art.; on the subject of undergoing an audit cp. Aeschin. 3, 22). Likew. περί τινος (Diod S 18, 60, 2 δοὺς αὑτῷ περὶ τούτων λόγον=taking account [considering] with himself; BGU 98, 25 περὶ τούτου) Mt 12:36; Ac 19:40. ὑπέρ τινος concerning someone Hv 3, 9, 10.—αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί τινος call someone to account for someth. 1 Pt 3:15 (cp. Pla., Pol. 285e; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 30; Apc4Esdr Fgm. b ἕκαστος ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔργου τὸν λόγον ἀπαιτηθήσεται; Just., A I, 17, 4. For another perspective s. d below.).—Of banking responsibility ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ (PStras 72, 10 [III A.D.] ὁ τῶν θεῶν λ.; PHerm 108 [III A.D.] λ. τοῦ Σαραπείου) in wordplay Ac 6:2 (w. τράπεζα q.v. 1c); s. also 1aβ.—Of a ledger heading (POxy 1333 [II/III A.D.] δὸς αὐτῳ λόγῳ θεωρικῶν=credit him under ‘festivals’; for others s. Preisig., Wörterbuch s.v. λ. 14; s. also Fachwörter 119) Ro 9:6 (the point is that God’s ‘list’ of Israelites is accurate; on ἐκπίπτω in the sense ‘is not deficient’ s. s.v. 4); vs. 9 (the ‘count’ is subsumed by metonymy in divine promise); Gal 5:14 (all moral obligations come under one ‘entry’: ‘you shall love your neighbor as yourself’; for commercial association of ἀναλίσκω vs. 15, which rounds out the wordplay, s. s.v.). The contexts of these three passages suggest strong probability for commercial associations; for another view s. 1aβ.
    settlement (of an account) (εἰς λόγον commercial t.t. ‘in settlement of an account’ POxy 275, 19; 21) εἰς λόγον δόσεως κ. λήμψεως in settlement of a mutual account (lit., ‘of giving and receiving’, ‘of debit and credit’) Phil 4:15 (cp. Plut., Mor. 11b λόγον δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν; a parallel formulation POxy 1134,10 [421 A.D.] λ. λήμματος καὶ ἐξοδιασμοῦ=ledger of income and expenditures); for the linked accounting terms δόσις and λήμψις s. PCairMasp 151, 208 [VI A.D.]. The same ideas are in the background of εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν credited to your account vs 17.—συναίρειν λόγον settle accounts (BGU 775, 18f. The mid. in the same mng. PFay109, 6 [I A.D.]; POxy 113, 27f.—Dssm., LO 94 [LAE 118f]) μετά τινος Mt 18:23; 25:19.
    reflection, respect, regard εἰς λόγον τινός with regard to, for the sake of (Thu. 3, 46, 4; Demosth. 19, 142 εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον; Polyb. 11, 28, 8; Ath. 31, 1; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 743 D.: εἰς δεινότητος λ.) εἰς λ. τιμῆς IPhld 11:2. εἰς λ. θεοῦ ISm 10:1.
    reason for or cause of someth., reason, ground, motive (Just., D. 94, 3 δότε μοι λόγον, ὅτου χάριν … ; Ath. 30, 3 τὶς γὰρ … λόγος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 18 ἐκ τούτου τ. λόγου; Appian, Hann. 29 §126 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 155) τίνι λόγω; for what reason? Ac 10:29 (cp. Pla., Gorg. 512c τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; Appian, Mithrid. 57 §232 τίνι λόγῳ;). λόγον περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Pt 3:15 (but s. a above); κατὰ λόγον Ac 18:14 (s. κατά B 5bβ). παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (though 1aε is also poss.).
    πρὸς ὸ̔ν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος (ἐστίν) with whom we have to do (i.e. to reckon) (Dio Chrys. 31, 123; other exx. in FBleek, Hb II/1, 1836, 590ff), in his capacity as judge (Libanius, Legat. Ulixis [=Declamatio IV] 2 F. τοῖς δὲ ἀδίκως ἀποκτενοῦσι καὶ πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ὁ λόγος γίγνεται) Hb 4:13. οὐ πρὸς σάρκα ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ πρὸς θεόν he has to do not with flesh, but with God IMg 3:2.
    In Col 2:23 (s. 1aβ) λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας may= make a case for wisdom (cp. λόγος ἡμῖν οὐδείς Plut., Mor. 870b).
    the independent personified expression of God, the Logos. Our lit. shows traces of a way of thinking that was widespread in contemporary syncretism, as well as in Jewish wisdom lit. and Philo, the most prominent feature of which is the concept of the Logos, the independent, personified ‘Word’ (of God): GJs 11:2 (word of the angel to Mary) συνλήμψῃ ἐκ Λόγου αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ πάντων Δεσπότου). J 1:1abc, 14 (cp. Just., A I, 23, 2; Mel., P. 9, 61 and oft. by all apolog., exc.. Ar.). It is the distinctive teaching of the Fourth Gospel that this divine ‘Word’ took on human form in a historical person, that is, in Jesus (s. RSeeberg, Festgabe für AvHarnack ’21, 263–81.—Λόγος w. ζωή in gnostic speculation: Iren.1, 1, 1 [Harv. 1, 10, 4]; Aelian, VH 4, 20 ἐκάλουν τὸν Πρωταγόραν Λόγον. Similarly Favorinus [II A.D.]: Vorsokr. 80 A 1 ln. 22 [in Diog. L. 9, 50] of Democritus: ἐκαλεῖτο Σοφία. Equating a divinity with an abstraction that she personifies: Artem. 5, 18 φρόνησις εἶναι νομίζεται ἡ θεός [Athena]). Cp. 1J 1:1; Rv 19:13. εἷς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰ. Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος, ἀπὸ σιγῆς προελθών there is one God, who has revealed himself through Jesus Christ his Son, who is his ‘Word’ proceeding from silence (i.e., without an oral pronouncement: in a transcendent manner) IMg 8:2 (s. σιγή). The Lord as νόμος κ. λόγος PtK 1. Cp. Dg 11:2, 3, 7, 8; 12:9.—HClavier, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 81–93: the Alexandrian eternal λόγος is also implied in Hb 4:12; 13:7.—S. also the ‘Comma Johanneum’ (to the bibliography in RGG3 I, ’54 [HGreeven] add AJülicher, GGA 1905, 930–35; AvHarnack, SBBerlAk 1915, 572f [=Studien I ’31, 151f]; MMeinertz, Einl. in d. NT4 ’33, 309–11; AGreiff, TQ 114, ’33, 465–80; CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46; WThiele, ZNW 50, ’59, 61–73) ὁ πατήρ, ὁ λόγος καὶ τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 1J 5:7 v.l. (s. N. app.; Borger, TRu 52, ’87, 57f). (Such interpolations were not unheard of. According to Diog. L. 1, 48 some people maintain that Solon inserted the verse mentioning the Athenians after Il. 2, 557.—τῆς τριάδος, τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς σοφίας αὐτοῦ Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 19].)—On the Logos: EZeller, D. Philosophie der Griechen III 24 1903, 417–34; MHeinze, D. Lehre v. Logos in d. griech. Philosophie 1872; PWendland, Philo u. d. kynisch-stoische Diatribe (Beiträge z. Gesch. der griech. Philosophie u. Religion by Wendl. and OKern 1895, 1–75); AAall, Gesch. d. Logosidee 1896, 1899; MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48f, I 482; 490 (index); LDürr, D. Wertung des göttl. Wortes im AT u. im ant. Orient ’38 (§9 of the Joh. Logos); EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1907, 83–111; (2 ’25); JLebreton, Les théories du Logos au début de l’ère chrétienne 1907; ESchwartz, NGG 1908, 537–56; GVos, The Range of the Logos-Title in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel: PTR 11, 1913, 365–419; 557–602; RHarris, The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel 1917, Athena, Sophia and the Logos: BJRL 7, 1, 1922 p. 56–72; M-JLagrange, Vers le Logos de S. Jean: RB 32, 1923, 161–84, Le Logos de Philon: ibid. 321–71; HLeisegang, Logos: Pauly-W. XIII 1926, 1035–81; TGlasson, Heraclitus’ Alleged Logos Doctr., JTS 3, ’52, 231–38.—NWeinstein, Z. Genesis d. Agada 1901, 29–90; Billerb. II 302–33.—Rtzst., Zwei religionsgeschichtl. Fragen 1901, 47–132, Mysterienrel.3 1927, 428 index; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 304ff; 316f; JKroll, D. Lehren d. Hermes Trismegistos1914, 418 index.—RBultmann, D. religionsgesch. Hintergrund des Prol. z. Joh.: HGunkel Festschr., 1923, II 1–26, Comm. ’41, 5ff; AAlexander, The Johannine Doctrine of the Logos: ET 36, 1925, 394–99; 467–72; (Rtzst. and) HSchaeder, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, 306–37; 350; GAvdBerghvanEysinga, In den beginne was de Logos: NThT 23, ’34, 105–23; JDillersberger, Das Wort von Logos ’35; RBury, The 4th Gosp. and the Logos-Doctrine ’40; EMay, CBQ 8, ’46, 438–47; GKnight, From Moses to Paul ’49, 120–29. TW IV 76–89; 126–40 (on this s. SLyonnet, Biblica 26, ’45, 126–31); CStange, ZST 21, ’50, 120–41; MBoismard, Le Prologue de St. Jean ’53; HLangkammer, BZ 9, ’65, 91–94; HRinggren, Word and Wisdom [hypostatization in Near East] ’47; WEltester, Haenchen Festschr., ’64, 109–34; HWeiss, Untersuchungen zur Kosmologie etc., TU 97, ’66, 216–82; MRissi, Die Logoslieder im Prolog des vierten Evangeliums, TZ 31, ’75, 321–36; HLausberg, NAWG, Ph. ’87, 1 pp. 1–7.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. λέγω B 1. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λόγος

  • 8 σχεδόν

    σχεδ-όν, Adv., ([etym.] ἔχω, σχεῖν):
    I of Place, near, hard by, [dialect] Ep. and Lyr.,

    δυσμενέες δ' ἄνδρες σ. εἵαται Il.10.100

    ;

    σ. εἴσιδε γαῖαν Od.5.392

    , cf. 24.493; σ. οὔτασε at close quarters, Il.5.458;

    μή πώς σ' ἠὲ βάλῃ ἠὲ σ. ἄορι τύψῃ 20.378

    , cf. 13.576, 16.828: sts. c. dat.,

    οὐ γάρ σφιν παῖδες σ. εἵαται 10.422

    ;

    νῆσοι ναιετάουσι σ. ἀλλήλῃσι Od.9.23

    ;

    οἳ δή σφι σ. εἰσι Hes.Sc. 113

    ; so στάθεν τύμβῳ ς. Pi.N.10.66 (also πὰρ ποδὶ ς. Id.O.1.74; ἀμφ' ἀνδριάντι ς. Id.P.5.40): more freq. c. gen., Φαιήκων γαίης ς. Od.5.288, cf. 475, 6.125, 9.117, 10.156, etc.;

    σ. αἵματος 11.142

    .
    2 with Verbs of motion,

    σ. ἐλθεῖν τινι Il.9.304

    , cf. Hes.Sc. 435; τινος Od.4.439;

    Ἀχαιίδος 11.481

    ;

    ὅστις σ. ἔγχεος ἔλθῃ Il.20.363

    .
    II metaph. ofrelationship, καὶ πηῷ περ ἐόντι μάλα ς. Od.10.441.
    2 similar to, c. dat.,

    σ. τούτοις.. αἱ παραλλαγαὶ.. εἰσίν Iamb.Comm.Math.27

    .
    III of Time, [

    θάνατος] δή τοις. εἶσι Il.17.202

    , cf. Od.2.284;

    σοὶ δὲ γάμος σ. ἐστιν 6.27

    ; σοὶ.. φημὶ σ. ἔμμεναι, ὁππότε.. [the time] is near, when.., Il.13.817.
    IV after Hom., about, approximately, more or less, roughly speaking,

    σ. κατὰ ταὐτά Hdt.6.42

    ;

    σ. τι ταὐτά Pl.Prm. 128b

    ;

    σ. τι τοιαῦτα Id.Smp. 201e

    ;

    σ. τι ταῦτα Id.Grg. 472c

    ;

    σ. πάντες Hdt.1.65

    , 2.48, X.HG6.5.33, cf. Act.Ap.13.44, PRyl.81.7 (ii A.D.); πάντα ς. Arist.Mete. 350b21;

    σ. ἅπαντας Ar.Ec. 1157

    ;

    πάντες σ. ἢ οἵ γε πλεῖστοι Arr.Epict.1.11.7

    ;

    σ. ἐκ κρηνῶν οἱ πλεῖστοι ῥέουσιν Arist.Mete. 350b34

    ; σ. περὶ τριακόσια στάδια ib. 351a14; σ. τι πρόσθεν ἢ.. not long before, S.OT 736;

    σ. ἤδη τῆς κοίτης ὥρη προσέρχεται ὑμῖν Hdt.5.20

    ; σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς σ. ἔσται ὁ διάλογος (audit)

    ἕως τῆς λ τοῦ Παχών PTeb.58.58

    (ii B.C.);

    σ... τὸν αὐτὸν.. καιρόν Inscr.Prien.105.13

    (i B.C.); also

    σ. ἴσως Pl.Sph. 253c

    , Arist.Top. 118a13;

    σ. που D.S.36.10

    ;

    σ. ὡς εἰπεῖν Arist.APo. 79a20

    , Rh. 1382b28, Gem.16.28; σ. εἰπεῖν one might almost say, Pl.Sph. 237c, Ath.Mech.3.4, POxy.1033.11 (iv A.D.), PLips.34.16 (iv A.D.).
    2 with Verbs (freq. in [tense] pf.), esp. of saying or knowing,

    σ. εἴρηχ' ἂ νομίζω συμφέρειν D.3.36

    ;

    εἴρηται σ. ἱκανῶς Arist.APr. 32a16

    ; διώρισται ς. Id.Pol. 1328a19;

    τὸν ἐμὸν.. σ. ἤδη νομίζων ἐκτετοξεῦσθαι βίον Ar.Pl.33

    ;

    σ. ἐπίσταμαι S.Tr.43

    ;

    σ. οἶδα E.Tr. 898

    ;

    ἐγὼ σ. τὸ πρᾶγμα γιγνώσκειν δοκῶ Ar.Pl. 860

    ; freq. used to soften a positive assertion with a sense of modesty, sts. of irony,

    σ. γὰρ.. συνίημι Hdt.5.19

    ; σ. τι τὴν σὴν οὐ καταισχύνω φύσιν I dare say I do not.., S.El. 609; σ. τι μώρῳ μωρίαν ὀφλισκάνω I dare say it is a fool who thinks me foolish, Id.Ant. 470; σ. δέ τι καὶ τὸ ξύμπαν generally speaking in every respect, Th.3.68; σ. οὐδ' ὁπωστιοῦν σοι πείσεται probably not at all, Pl.Phd. 61c; σ. γὰρ ἔχω ὃ εἰπὼν ἀναγκάσω σε I think I have an argument, Id.Phdr. 236d.
    3 used in affirmative answers, I suppose so, I dare say, Id.Sph. 250c, 255c, al.
    V perhaps, ὑποδραμὼν σ. φασεῖ ( φάσει codd.) Dius ap.Stob.4.21.17.
    VI = σχέδην, ἠκολούθει σ. J.BJ1.17.2 (unless = followed at no long distance).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σχεδόν

  • 9 καί

    καί conjunction (Hom.+), found most frequently by far of all Gk. particles in the NT; since it is not only used much more commonly here than in other Gk. lit. but oft. in a different sense, or rather in different circumstances, it contributes greatly to some of the distinctive coloring of the NT style.—HMcArthur, ΚΑΙ Frequency in Greek Letters, NTS 15, ’68/69, 339–49. The vivacious versatility of κ. (for earlier Gk. s. Denniston 289–327) can easily be depressed by the tr. ‘and’, whose repetition in a brief area of text lacks the support of arresting aspects of Gk. syntax.
    marker of connections, and
    single words
    α. gener. Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας Mt 13:55. χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν 2:11. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή Ro 7:12. πολυμερῶς κ. πολυτρόπως Hb 1:1. ὁ θεὸς κ. πατήρ God, who is also the Father 1 Cor 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; Js 1:27; 3:9 al.—Connects two occurrences of the same word for emphasis (OGI 90, 19 [196 B.C.] Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας κ. μέγας; pap in Mayser II/1, 54) μείζων κ. μείζων greater and greater Hv 4, 1, 6. ἔτι κ. ἔτι again and again B 21:4; Hs 2, 6 (B-D-F §493, 1; 2; s. Rob. 1200).
    β. w. numerals, w. the larger number first δέκα καὶ ὁκτώ Lk 13:16. τεσσεράκοντα κ. ἕξ J 2:20. τετρακόσιοι κ. πεντήκοντα Ac 13:20.—The καί in 2 Cor 13:1 ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα=‘or’ ([v.l. ἢ τριῶν for καὶ τριῶν as it reads Mt 18:16]; cp. Js 4:13 v.l. σήμερον καὶ αὔριον=‘today or tomorrow’, but s. above all Thu. 1, 82, 2; Pla., Phd. 63e; X., De Re Equ. 4, 4 ἁμάξας τέτταρας καὶ πέντε; Heraclides, Pol. 58 τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρας; Polyb. 3, 51, 12 ἐπὶ δυεῖν καὶ τρισὶν ἡμέραις; 5, 90, 6; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 28 εἷς καὶ δύο=one or two; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1091 p. 305, 22 W. τριέτης καὶ τετραέτης) by the statement of two or three witnesses every charge must be sustained, as explained by Dt 19:15.
    γ. adding the whole to the part and in general (Aristoph., Nub. 1239 τὸν Δία καὶ τοὺς θεούς; Thu. 1, 116, 3; 7, 65, 1) Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι Peter and the rest of the apostles Ac 5:29. οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ. τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον the high priest and all the rest of the council Mt 26:59. Vice versa, adding a (specially important) part to the whole and especially (πᾶς Ἰουδὰ καὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ 2 Ch 35:24; cp. 32, 33; 1 Macc 2:6) τοῖς μαθηταῖς κ. τῷ Πέτρῳ Mk 16:7. σὺν γυναιξὶ κ. Μαριάμ Ac 1:14.
    δ. The expr. connected by καί can be united in the form of a hendiadys (Alcaeus 117, 9f D.2 χρόνος καὶ καρπός=time of fruit; Soph., Aj. 144; 749; Polyb. 6, 9, 4; 6, 57, 5 ὑπεροχὴ καὶ δυναστεία=1, 2, 7; 5, 45, 1 ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δυναστείας; Diod S 5, 67, 3 πρὸς ἀνανέωσιν καὶ μνήμην=renewal of remembrance; 15, 63, 2 ἀνάγκη καὶ τύχη=compulsion of fate; 16, 93, 2 ἐπιβουλὴ κ. θάνατος=a fatal plot; Jos., Ant. 12, 98 μετὰ χαρᾶς κ. βοῆς=w. a joyful cry; 17, 82 ἀκρίβεια κ. φυλακή) ἐξίσταντο ἐπὶ τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ they were amazed at his intelligent answers Lk 2:47. δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα κ. σοφίαν I will give you wise utterance 21:15. τροφὴ κ. εὐφροσύνη joy concerning (your) food Ac 14:17. ἐλπὶς κ. ἀνάστασις hope of a resurrection 23:6 (2 Macc 3:29 ἐλπὶς καὶ σωτηρία; s. OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f; GBjörck, ConNeot 4, ’40, 1–4).
    ε. A colloquial feature is the coordination of two verbs, one of which should be a ptc. (s. B-D-F §471; Rob. 1135f) ἀποτολμᾷ κ. λέγει = ἀποτολμῶν λέγει he is so bold as to say Ro 10:20. ἔσκαψεν κ. ἐβάθυνεν (=βαθύνας) Lk 6:48. ἐκρύβη κ. ἐξῆλθεν (=ἐξελθών) J 8:59. Sim. χαίρων κ. βλέπων I am glad to see Col 2:5. Linking of subordinate clause and ptc. Μαριὰμ ὡς ἦλθεν … καὶ ἰδοῦσα J 11:32 v.l. Cp. παραλαβών … καὶ ἀνέβη Lk 9:28 v.l.
    clauses and sentences
    α. gener.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει κ. τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). εἰσῆλθον … κ. ἐδίδασκον Ac 5:21. διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ κ. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον Mt 3:12. κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία Ro 4:14 and very oft. Connecting two questions Mt 21:23, or quotations (e.g. Ac 1:20), and dialogue (Lk 21:8), or alternate possibilities (13:18).
    β. Another common feature is the practice, drawn fr. Hebrew or fr. the speech of everyday life, of using κ. as a connective where more discriminating usage would call for other particles: καὶ εἶδον καὶ (for ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο Rv 6:12. καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς … καὶ (for ὅτι) ἔλεγον and the king learned that they were saying Mk 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92; on this JBlinzler, Philol. 96, ’43/44, 119–31). τέξεται υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (for οὗ τὸ ὄνομα καλ.) Mt 1:21; cp. Lk 6:6; 11:44. καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς Mk 9:5. Esp. freq. is the formula in historical narrative καὶ ἐγένετο … καὶ (like וַ … וַיְהִי) and it happened or came about … that Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15; Lk 5:1 v.l. (for ἐγένετο δὲ … καὶ; so also the text of 6:12), 12, 17; 14:1; 17:11 al. (Gen 7:10 al.; JosAs 11:1; 22:1). S. MJohannessohn, Das bibl. Καὶ ἐγένετο u. seine Geschichte, 1926 (fr. ZVS 35, 1925, 161–212); KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 29–62; Mlt-Turner 334f; ÉDelebecque, Études Grecques sur L’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65; JVoelz, The Language of the NT: ANRW II/25/2, 893–977, esp. 959–64.—As in popular speech, κ. is used in rapid succession Mt 14:9ff; Mk 1:12ff; Lk 18:32ff; J 2:13ff; 1 Cor 12:5f; Rv 6:12ff; 9:1ff. On this kind of colloquial speech, which joins independent clauses rather than subordinating one to the other (parataxis rather than hypotaxis) s. B-D-F §458; Rdm.2 p. 222; Rob. 426; Dssm., LO 105ff (LAE 129ff), w. many references and parallels fr. secular sources. This is a favorite, e.g., in Polyaenus 2, 3, 2–4; 2, 4, 3; 3, 9, 10; 3, 10, 2; 4, 6, 1; 7, 36 al.
    γ. It is also coordination rather than subordination when κ. connects an expr. of time with that which occurs in the time (Od. 5, 362; Hdt. 7, 217; Thu. 1, 50, 5; Pla., Symp. 220c; Aeschin. 3, 71 νὺξ ἐν μέσῳ καὶ παρῆμεν; s. B-D-F §442, 4; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griechische Gramm. 1913, 640*): ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα κ. παραδίδοται the time has come when he is to be given up Mt 26:45. κ. ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν when they crucified him Mk 15:25. κ. ἀνέβη εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα when he went up to Jerusalem J 2:13. κ. συντελέσω when I will make Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); cp. J 4:35; 7:33; Lk 19:43; 23:44; Ac 5:7.
    δ. καί introducing an apodosis is really due to Hebr./LXX infl. (B-D-F §442, 7; Abel §78a, 6 p. 341; Mlt-H. 422; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 66–72; but not offensive to ears trained in good Gk.: s. Il. 1, 478; Hdt. 1, 79, 2; sim.Thu. 2, 93, 4 ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐχώρουν εὐθύς; 8, 27, 5; Herm. Wr. 13, 1 …, καὶ ἔφης; Delebecque [s. above in β] 130–32) καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ …, κ. ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 3:20. Also κ. ἰδού in an apodosis Lk 7:12; Ac 1:10.
    ε. connecting negative and affirmative clauses Lk 3:14. οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις κ. τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ you have no bucket, and the well is deep J 4:11; cp. 3J 10 (οὔτε … καί Eur., Iph. Taur. 591f; Longus, Past. 1, 17; 4, 28; Aelian, NA 1, 57; 11, 9; Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 2, 4 οὔτε πάντα ἡ Λεσβία, Δωρί, πρὸς σὲ ἐψεύσατο καὶ σὺ τἀληθῆ ἀπήγγελκας Μυρτίῳ ‘It wasn’t all lies that Lesbia told you, Doris; and you certainly reported the truth to Myrtium’). After a negative clause, which influences the clause beginning w. καί: μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν … κ. στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς Mt 7:6; cp. 5:25; 10:38; 13:15 (Is 6:10); 27:64; Lk 12:58; 21:34; J 6:53; 12:40 (Is 6:10); Ac 28:27 (Is 6:10); 1 Th 3:5; Hb 12:15; Rv 16:15.
    ζ. to introduce a result that comes fr. what precedes: and then, and so Mt 5:15; 23:32; Mk 8:34; 2 Cor 11:9; Hb 3:19; 1J 3:19. καὶ ἔχομεν and so we have 2 Pt 1:19. Esp. after the impv., or expr. of an imperatival nature (Soph., Oed. Col. 1410ff θέσθε … καὶ … οἴσει, El. 1207; Sir 2:6; 3:17) δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου καὶ ποιήσω and then I will make Mt 4:19. εἰπὲ λόγῳ, κ. ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου speak the word, and then my servant will be cured Mt 8:8; Lk 7:7; cp. Mt 7:7; Mk 6:22; Lk 10:28; J 14:16; Js 4:7, 10; Rv 4:1.—καί introduces a short clause that confirms the existence of someth. that ought to be: ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καὶ ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are (καλέω 1d) 1J 3:1 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §161 they were to conquer Sardinia, καὶ κατέλαβον=and they really took it; 4, 127 §531 one day would decide [κρίνειν] the fate of Rome, καὶ ἐκρίθη).
    η. emphasizing a fact as surprising or unexpected or noteworthy: and yet, and in spite of that, nevertheless (Eur., Herc. Fur. 509; Philostrat., Her. 11 [II 184, 29 Kayser] ῥητορικώτατον καὶ δεινόν; Longus, Past. 4, 17 βουκόλος ἦν Ἀγχίσης καὶ ἔσχεν αὐτὸν Ἀφροδίτη) κ. σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; and yet you come to me? Mt 3:14; cp. 6:26; 10:29; Mk 12:12; J 1:5, 10; 3:11, 32; 5:40; 6:70; 7:28; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:9; Hb 3:9 (Ps 94:9); Rv 3:1. So also, connecting what is unexpected or otherw. noteworthy with an attempt of some kind (JBlomqvist, Das sogennante και adversativum ’79): but ζητεῖ κ. οὐχ εὑρίσκει but he finds none (no resting place) Mt 12:43. ἐπεθύμησαν ἰδεῖν κ. οὐχ εἶδαν but did not see (it) 13:17; cp. 26:60; Lk 13:7; 1 Th 2:18. Cp. GJs 18:3 (not pap). Perhaps Mk 5:20. Introducing a contrasting response καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι Hv 2, 1, 3.
    θ. to introduce an abrupt question, which may often express wonder, ill-will, incredulity, etc. (B-D-F §442, 8. For older lit. exx. of this usage s. Kühner-G. II p. 247f; for later times EColwell, The Gk. of the Fourth Gospel ’31, 87f): κ. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο; how have I deserved this? Lk 1:43. κ. τίς; who then? Mk 10:26; Lk 10:29; J 9:36. καὶ τί γέγονεν ὅτι … ; how does it happen that … ? 14:22. καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις … ; how is it, then, that you say … J 14:9 v.l. W. a protasis εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, κ. τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με; for if I make you sad, who then will cheer me up? 2 Cor 2:2 (cp. Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 43; 44 εἰ [ὁ θεὸς] ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει;). Thus Phil 1:22 is prob. to be punctuated as follows (s. ADebrunner, GGA 1926, 151): εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, τοῦτο μοι καρπὸς ἔργου, καὶ τί αἱρήσομαι; οὐ γνωρίζω but if living on here means further productive work, then which shall I choose? I really don’t know. καὶ πῶς αὐτοῦ υἱός ἐστιν; how, then, is he his son? Lk 20:44 (cp. Gen 39:9).
    ι. to introduce a parenthesis (Eur., Orest. 4, Hel. 393; X., Equ. 11, 2.—B-D-F §465, 1; Rob. 1182) κ. ἐκωλύθην ἄρχι τοῦ δεῦρο but so far I have been prevented Ro 1:13.
    oft. explicative; i.e., a word or clause is connected by means of καί w. another word or clause, for the purpose of explaining what goes before it and so, that is, namely (PPetr II, 18 [1], 9 πληγὰς … καὶ πλείους=blows … indeed many of them.—Kühner-G. II 247; B-D-F §442, 9; Rob. 1181; Mlt-Turner 335) χάριν κ. ἀποστολήν grace, that is, the office of an apostle Ro 1:5. ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τ. δαιμονιζομένων they told everything, namely what had happened to those who were possessed Mt 8:33. καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος that is, grace upon grace J 1:16. Cp. 1 Cor 3:5; 15:38.—Mt 21:5.—Other explicative uses are καὶ οὗτος, καὶ τοῦτο, καὶ ταῦτα (the first and last are in earlier Gk.: Hdt., X. et al.; s. Kühner-G. I 647; II 247) and, also ascensive and indeed, and at that Ἰ. Χρ., καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον J. Chr., (and) indeed him on the cross 1 Cor 2:2. καὶ τοῦτο Ro 13:11; 1 Cor 6:6, 8; Eph 2:8. καὶ ταῦτα w. ptc. and to be sure Hb 11:12. See B-D-F §290, 5; 425, 1; 442, 9.—The ascensive force of καί is also plain in Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον a Roman citizen, and uncondemned at that Ac 22:25. ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστιν an hour is coming, indeed it is already here J 5:25. προσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ πᾶσιν καὶ κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ added this on top of everything else, namely to put John in prison Lk 3:20.
    After πολύς and before a second adj. καί is pleonastic fr. the viewpoint of modern lang. (earlier Gk.: Hom. et al. [Kühner-G. II 252, 1]; cp. Cebes 1, 1 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα ἀναθήματα; 2, 3; B-D-F §442, 11) πολλὰ … κ. ἄλλα σημεῖα many other signs J 20:30 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 318). πολλὰ κ. βαρέα αἰτιώματα many severe charges Ac 25:7. πολλὰ … καὶ ἕτερα Lk 3:18 (cp. Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 6 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα). πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι Tit 1:10.
    introducing someth. new, w. loose connection: Mt 4:23; 8:14, 23, 28; 9:1, 9, 27, 35; 10:1; 12:27; Mk 5:1, 21; Lk 8:26; J 1:19 and oft.
    καί … καί both … and, not only …, but also (Synes., Dreams 10 p. 141b καὶ ἀπιστεῖν ἔξεστι καὶ πιστεύειν.—B-D-F §444, 3; Rob. 1182; Mlt-Turner 335) connecting single expressions Mt 10:28; Mk 4:41; Ro 11:33; Phil 2:13; 4:12. κ. ἐν ὀλίγῳ κ. ἐν μεγάλῳ Ac 26:29. κ. ἅπαξ κ. δίς (s. ἅπαξ 1) Phil 4:16; 1 Th 2:18. Connecting whole clauses or sentences: Mk 9:13; J 7:28; 9:37; 12:28; 1 Cor 1:22. Introducing contrasts: although … yet (Anthol. VII, 676 Δοῦλος Ἐπίκτητος γενόμην καὶ σῶμʼ ἀνάπηρος καὶ πενίην ῏Ιρος καὶ φίλος ἀθανάτοις ‘I was Epictetus, a slave; crippled in body and an Iros [a beggar in Hom., Od.] in poverty, but dear to the Immortals’) J 15:24; Ac 23:3. καὶ … κ. οὐ Lk 5:36; J 6:36. καὶ οὐ … καί 17:25; κ. … κ. now … now Mk 9:22. On τὲ … καί s. τέ 2c. Somet. w. ἤ q.v. 1aβ.—HCadbury, Superfluous καί in the Lord’s Prayer (i.e. Mt 6:12) and Elsewhere: Munera Studiosa (=WHatch Festschr.) ’46.
    marker to indicate an additive relation that is not coordinate to connect clauses and sentences, also, likewise, funct. as an adv.
    simply κ. τὴν ἄλλην the other one also Mt 5:39; cp. vs. 40; 6:21; 12:45; Mk 1:38; 2:26; 8:7 and oft. Freq. used w. pronouns κἀγώ (q.v.). καὶ σύ Mt 26:73. κ. ὑμεῖς 20:4, 7; Lk 21:31; J 7:47 and oft. κ. αὐτός (s. αὐτός 1f).
    intensive: even Mt 5:46f; 10:30; Mk 1:27; Lk 10:17; J 14:9 v.l.; Ac 5:39; 22:28; Ro 9:24 (ἀλλὰ καί); 1 Cor 2:10; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 2:17; Eph 5:12; Phlm 21; Hb 7:25; 1 Pt 4:19 (but s. d below); Jd 23; Hs 5, 2, 10; 7:1; ἔτι καὶ νῦν Dg 2:3. CBlackman, JBL 87, ’68, 203f would transl. Ro 3:26b: even in the act of declaring righteous (cp. the gen. abs. Polemon Soph. B 14 Reader καὶ Δάτιδος ἀποπλέοντος=even though Datis was sailing away). In formulas expressing a wish: ὄφελον καί if only, would that Gal 5:12. In connection w. a comparative: κ. περισσότερον προφήτου one who is even more than a prophet Mt 11:9. κ. μείζονα ποιήσει J 14:12.
    In sentences denoting a contrast καί appears in var. ways, somet. in both members of the comparison, and oft. pleonastically, to our way of thinking καθάπερ …, οὕτως καί as …, thus also 2 Cor 8:11. ὥσπερ …, οὕτως καί (Hyperid. 1, 2, 5–8) Ro 5:19; 11:30f; 1 Cor 11:12; 15:22; Gal 4:29. ὡς …, οὕτως καί Ro 5:15, 18. ὸ̔ν τρόπον …, οὕτως καί 2 Ti 3:8.—οὕτως καί thus also Ro 6:11. ὡσαύτως καί in the same way also 1 Cor 11:25. ὁμοίως καί (Jos., Bell. 2, 575) J 6:11; Jd 8. ὡς καί Ac 11:17; 1 Cor 7:7; 9:5. καθὼς καί Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 13:12; 2 Cor 1:14; Eph 4:17. καθάπερ καί Ro 4:6; 2 Cor 1:14.—καί can also stand alone in the second member w. the mng. so also, so. ὡς … καί Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20. καθὼς … καί Lk 6:31 v.l.; J 6:57; 13:15; 1 Cor 15:49.—οἷος …, τοιοῦτος καί 1 Cor 15:48. After a comp. ὅσῳ καί by so much also Hb 8:6. καί is found in both members of the comparison (s. Kühner-G. II 256; 2 Macc 2:10; 6:14) Ro 1:13; 1 Th 2:14. καθὼς καὶ … οὕτως καί Col 3:13 (cp. Hyperid. 1, 40, 20–25 ὥσπερ καὶ … οὕτω καί; 3, 38).
    w. expressions that introduce cause or result, here also pleonastic to a considerable degree διὰ τοῦτο καί for this reason (also) Lk 11:49; J 12:18. διὸ καί Lk 1:35; Ac 10:29; Ro 4:22; Hb 13:12. εἰς τοῦτο καί 2 Cor 2:9. ὥστε καί 1 Pt 4:19 (but this pass. may well fit in b). ὅθεν καί Hb 7:25; 11:19.
    after an interrogative (as Thu., X., et al.; s. Kühner-G. II 255. S. also B-D-F §442, 14) at all, still ἱνατί καὶ τ. γῆν καταργεῖ; Lk 13:7. τί καί; (Hyperid. 3, 14 τί καὶ ἀδικεῖ; what kind of wrong, then, is he committing?) τί καὶ ἐλπίζει; why does he still (need to) hope? Ro 8:24. v.l. τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; why are they baptized (at all)? 1 Cor 15:29; cp. vs. 30.
    used w. a relative, it oft. gives greater independence to the foll. relative clause: Mk 3:14; Lk 10:30; J 11:2 v.l.; Ac 1:3, 11; 7:45; 10:39; 11:30; 12:4; 13:22; 28:10; Ro 9:24; 1 Cor 11:23; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29 al.
    used pleonastically w. prep.
    α. μετά (BGU 412, 6 μετὰ καὶ τ. υἱοῦ) Phil 4:3.
    β. σύν (ins in PASA III 612; PFay 108; BGU 179, 19; 515, 17) 1 Cl 65:1.—Dssm., NB 93 (BS 265f).
    w. double names ὁ καί who is also called … (the earliest ex. in a fragment of Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 15, 51 p. 469, 23 Jac. ῏Ωχος καὶ Δαρειαῖος [s. Hatch 141]; OGI 565; 574; 583; 589; 603; 604; 620; 623; 636; POxy 45; 46; 54; 101; 485; 1279; PFay 30; BGU 22, 25; 36, 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 240; 5, 85; 12, 285; 13, 320; 18, 35. Further material in WSchmid, Der Atticismus III 1893, 338; Dssm., B 181ff [BS 313–17]. Lit. in B-D-F §268, 1) Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9. Ἰγνάτιος, ὁ καὶ Θεοφόρος ins of all the letters of Ign.
    with other particles
    α. καὶ γάρ for (s. γάρ 1b).—καὶ γὰρ … ἀλλά (or granted that … but) 2 Cor 13:4; Phil 2:27.—καὶ γὰρ οὐ(κ): neither 1 Cor 11:9; for even … not 2 Cor 3:10.
    β. καί γε (without intervening word [opp. earlier Gk, e.g. Pla., Phd. 58d; Rep. 7, 531a]: Hippocr., Septim. 9, VII 450 Littré; Cornutus p. 40, 12; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; Rhetor Apsines [III A.D.] p. 332, 17 Hammer; TestReub 4:4 al.; for גָּם always in Theod. [DBarthélemy, Les devanciers d’Aquila ’63, 31ff]), weakened force: (if) only or at least Lk 19:42 v.l.; intensive: indeed (Jos. Ant 29, 19) Ac 2:18 (J 3:2 v.l.; Mel., P. 30, 207); Hm 8:5; 9:9. καί γε οὐ μακράν= and indeed God is not far Ac 17:27.—Kühner-G. II 176b; Schwyzer II 561; B-D-F §439, 2; Rdm.2 35–37.
    γ. καὶ … δέ and also, but also (s. δέ 5b).
    δ. καίτοι (Il. 13, 267 et al., ins, pap; 4 Macc 2:6; 5:18; 7:13; Ath. 8, 1 al.; Mel., P. 58, 422) particle (B-D-F §425, 1; 450, 3; Rob. 1129 and 1154) w. finite verb (Chion, Ep. 3, 1; Jos. Ant. 5, 78) yet, on the other hand Ac 14:17. W. gen. abs. foll. (BGU 850, 4 [76 A.D.] καίτοι ἐμοῦ σε πολλὰ ἐρωτήσαντος; 898, 26; Philo, Vi. Mos. 1, 20; Jos., Ant. 2, 321; Ath. 19, 2; 25, 2) Hb 4:3.—καίτοι γε or καί τοι γε (since Aristoph., Ach. 611; but esp. in later Gk. [cp. Schwyzer II 561; MMeister, De Aiocho dial., Breslau diss. 1915 p. 31, 5]; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 364b; Jos., Bell. 1, 7, Ant. 5, 36; Epict. 3, 24, 90; Just., A II, 11, 2; D. 7, 3; Ath. 3, 1; 22, 7; SIG 685, 76 and 82 [139 B.C.]) although J 4:2; Ac 14:17 v.l.; Dg 8:3. W. part. foll. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 230; Mel., P. 58, 422) AcPt Ox 849, 18.—Kühner-G. II 151f; B-D-F §439, 1; 450, 3.—For ἀλλὰ κ., δὲ και, ἐὰν κ., εἰ κ., ἢ κ. s. ἀλλά, δέ, ἐάν, εἰ, ἤ.—ERobson, KAI-Configurations in the Gk. NT, 3 vols. diss. Syracuse ’79. LfgrE s.v. καί col. 1273f (lit.). DELG. M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καί

  • 10 φημί

    A

    φῄς, φηις PCair.Zen.316.1

    (iii B. C.), PSI7.846.7 (Pap. of Ar. (?), ii/iii A. D.), cf. Hdn.Gr.2.147, 419; φησί (apocop.

    φή Anacr.40

    ); pl. φᾰμέν, φᾰτέ, φᾱσί; [dialect] Dor. [full] φᾱμί, φᾱσί or φᾱτί (Ar.Ach. 771, Anon. in PSI9.1091.11, 18), [ per.] 3pl. φαντί; [dialect] Aeol. [full] φᾶμι Sapph.32, [ per.] 2sg.

    φαῖσθα Alc.Supp.20.6

    , [ per.] 3sg. φαῖσι ib.26.5, Sapph.66, [ per.] 3pl.

    φαῖσι Sapph. Supp.5.2

    : [tense] aor. 2 ἔφην, [dialect] Ep.

    φῆν Il.18.326

    ;

    ἔφησθα 1.397

    , al., Ar.Lys. 132, X.An.1.6.7, Pl.Cra. 438a, Aeschin.3.164, etc. (rarely

    ἔφης Il.22.280

    , X.Cyr.4.1.23), [dialect] Ep.

    φῆσθα Il.21.186

    , Od.14.149 (v.l. φῇσθα)

    , φῆς Il.5.473

    , Od.7.239 (v.l.); ἔφη, [dialect] Ep. φῆ, [dialect] Dor.

    φᾶ Pi.I.2.11

    ; [ per.] 1pl.

    ἔφᾰμεν Isoc.3.26

    (

    ἔφημεν A.D.Adv.184.7

    , Gal.1.158, Papp.524.16, Choerob. in Theod.2.341 H.); [ per.] 2pl.

    ἔφᾰτε And.2.25

    ; [ per.] 3pl. ἔφασαν, [dialect] Ep.

    φάσαν Il.2.278

    , also ἔφᾰν, φάν, 3.161, 6.108; imper. φαθί (on the accent v. Hdn.Gr.1.431, al., A.D.Synt.264.4; φάθι is found in codd. of Pl. Grg. 475e, al.); subj. φῶ, φῇς, φῇ, [dialect] Ep.

    φῇσιν Od.1.168

    ,

    φήῃ 11.128

    , 23.275; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. subj.

    φᾶντι Tab.Heracl.1.116

    ; opt. φαίην, [ per.] 1pl.

    φαῖμεν Il.2.81

    , 24.222, Pi.N.7.87, [ per.] 3pl.

    φαῖεν Th.3.68

    , etc.; inf. φάναι, Hdt.1.27, etc., poet.

    φάμεν Pi.N.8.19

    ; part.

    φάς Il.9.35

    , Hdt.1.63, 141, SIG279.18 (Zeleia, iv B. C.),

    φᾶσα Hdt.6.135

    , pl.

    φάντες Il.3.44

    , 14.126, Pl.Alc.2.139b: [tense] fut. φήσω, [dialect] Dor.

    φασῶ Ar.Ach. 739

    , etc.; [ per.] 1pl.

    φασοῦμες Diotog.

    ap. Stob.4.1.133: [tense] aor. 1

    ἔφησα Cratin.

    in PSI11.1212.9, Hdt.3.153, PCair.Zen.19.3 (iii B. C.) ( ἔφασεν is dub. ib.140.7); [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3sg.

    φᾶσε Pi.N.1.66

    ; [ per.] 2sg. subj. ([dialect] Dor.) φάσῃς [ᾱ] Simon.32 ( φήσῃς etc. codd. Stob., corr. Bgk.); opt.

    φήσειε Hdt.6.69

    , A.Pr. 503, part.

    φήσας X.Mem.3.11.1

    , Isoc.12.239, inf.

    φῆσαι Thphr. Char.2.7

    :—[voice] Med. (chiefly poet. in early writers), [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. 2 ἐφάμην, ἔφατο (also SIG437.6 (Delph., iii B. C.), PCair.Zen.343.8 (iii B. C.), PSI4.437.8 (iii B. C.), Parth.4.5, etc.), [dialect] Ep.

    φάτο Il.20.262

    ,

    φάσθε Od.6.200

    , 10.562, ἔφαντο, [dialect] Ep.

    φάντο 24.460

    ; imper.

    φάο 16.168

    , 18.171, φάσθω, φάσθε; inf. φάσθαι; part. φάμενος (also Archim. Spir. Prooem., Eratosth.Prooem., SIG364.83 (Ephesus, iii B. C.), PCair.Zen.236.4 (iii B. C.), PHamb.4.14 (i A. D.), J.AJ17.12.2, Gal. 6.228, etc.): [dialect] Dor. [tense] fut. φάσομαι [ᾱ] Pi.N.9.43:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf. [ per.] 3sg.

    πέφαται A.R.2.500

    ; [ per.] 3sg. imper.

    πεφάσθω Pl.Ti. 72d

    ; but part.

    πεφασμένος Il.14.127

    , A.Pr. 843 shd. be referred to φαίνω: [tense] aor. ἐφάθην ([etym.] ἀπ-, κατ-) Arist.Int. 18b39. The [tense] pres. indic. φημί is enclit., exc. in [ per.] 2sg. [tense] pres. φῄς: φαμέν is [ per.] 1pl. [tense] pres., φάμεν poet. inf.: φαντί is [ per.] 3pl., φάντι part.
    II φάσκω supplied all moods of [tense] pres. except the indic., also [tense] impf. ἔφασκον; cf. ἠμί. [, except in φᾱσι, and in masc. and fem. part. φάς, φᾶσα: in inf. φάναι ᾰ always; φᾶναι is corrupt in Eub.119.11 codd. Ath.]:—say, affirm, assert, either abs., or folld. by inf., e. g. Λυσίθευς Μικίωνα φιλῖν ( = -εῖν)

    φησι IG12.924

    , cf. 57.48, or acc. et inf.; the inf. is freq. omitted, σὲ κακὸν καὶ ἀνάλκιδα φήσει (sc. εἶναι) Il.8.153; also Κορινθίους τί φῶμεν; what shall we say of them? X.HG3.5.12;

    φ. πρός τινα, πρὸς ξεῖνον φάσθαι ἔπος ἠδ' ἐπακοῦσαι Od.17.584

    : less freq. c. dat.,

    αὐτοῖς Ev.Matt.13.28

    ; κατά τινος φ. to speak against him, X.Ap.25: sts. folld. by ὡς, Lys.7.19, v.l. in X. HG6.3.7; by ὅτι, Pl.Grg. 487d, Corn.ND30; by an interrog. clause,

    μή ποτε φάσῃς ὅ τι γίνεται αὔριον Simon.

    l.c.; by part., dub. in Pl. Grg. 481c (fort. leg. θῶμεν); also parenthetic,

    τίνες, φῄς, ἦσαν οἱ λόγοι; Pl.Phd. 59c

    .
    b since what one says commonly expresses a belief or opinion, think, deem, suppose,

    φῆ γὰρ ὅ γ' αἱρήσειν Πριάμου πόλιν Il. 2.37

    ; φαίης κε ζάκοτόν τέ τιν' ἔμμεναι ἄφρονά τε you would say, would think, he was.., 3.220; ἶσον ἐμοὶ φάσθαι to say he is (i. e. fancy himself) equal to me, 1.187, 15.167; μὴ.. φαθὶ λεύσσειν think not that you see, Theoc.22.56; τί φῄς; what say you? i.e. what think you? (v. infr. 11.5);

    λέγ' ἀνύσας ὅ τι φῄς Ar.Pl. 349

    :—so φ. δεῖν, φ. χρῆναι, deem it right, And.3.34, Isoc.3.48.
    c say, i.e. write, of an author,

    ὡς ἔφημεν Gal.1.158

    , etc.—The [voice] Med. has all these senses as well as the [voice] Act.
    II Special Phrases:
    1 φασί, they say, it is said, Il.5.638, Od.6.42, etc.; parenthetically, Arist.EN 1109a35, Men.Epit. 223, etc.: Prose writers use φησί when quoting, D.23.89, etc.; φησίν saith He, 1 Ep.Cor.6.16; esp. of an opponent's objection, Plu.2.112c; even after a plural,

    ὅ τοίνυν μέγιστον ἔχειν οἴονται.. καὶ αὐτός, φησί, τῶν εἰσιόντων ἦσθα Lib.Or.52.39

    ; "τὸν δὲ μετ' εἰσενόησα, ἔφη Ὅμηρος as H. said, Pl.Prt. 315b.
    2 joined with a synon. Verb, ἔφη λέγων, ἔφησε λέγων, Hdt.3.156, 6.137, etc.;

    ἔλεγε φάς Id.1.122

    ; λέγει οὐδέν, φαμένη .. Id.2.22;

    τί ἐροῦμεν ἢ τί φήσομεν; D.8.37

    , cf. 25.100;

    τί φῶ; τί λέξω; E.Hel. 483

    .
    3 in repeating dialogues the Verb commonly goes before its subject, ἔφην ἐγώ, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, said I, said S., but the order is sts. inverted, ἐγὼ ἔφην, ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη, I said, S. said.
    4 inserted parenthetically, though the sentence has been introduced by λέγει, εἶπεν, etc.,

    ὁ Ἰσχόμαχος.. εἶπεν· ἀλλὰ παίζεις μὲν σύ γε, ἔφη X.Oec.17.10

    , cf. Pl.Chrm. 164e;

    ἡ κρίσις.. διαρρήδην λέγει διότι, φησίν, ἔδοξε τἀληθῆ εἰσαγγεῖλαι Lys.13.50

    .
    5

    τί φημί; S.OT 1471

    , and

    τί φῄς; Ph. 804

    , E.Hel. 706 (dub.), are used extra metrum, as exclamations.
    6 κυριώτατα φάναι, in parenthesis, strictly speaking, Ph.2.374; ὡς οὕτω φάναι, = ὡς εἰπεῖν, ἅπασαι ὡς οὕτω φάναι practically all, Gal.Vict.Att.9; συνελόντα (v.l. -όντι) φάναι, = συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, Id.16.502.
    7 Οἰδίπουν.. ἂν μόνον φῶ if I only mention Oedipus, Antiph.191.6, cf. Pl.Cra. 411a, 435a.
    III like κατάφημι, say yes, affirm, assert, καὶ τοὺς φάναι and they said yes, Hdt.8.88;

    καί φημι κἀπόφημι S.OC 317

    ;

    ἔγωγέ φημι Pl. Grg. 526c

    ;

    φάναι τε καὶ ἀπαρνεῖσθαι Id.Tht. 165a

    : c. inf.,

    φῂς ἢ καταρνεῖ μὴ δεδρακέναι τάδε; S.Ant. 442

    ; but οὔ φημι means say no, deny, refuse, c. inf., ἡ Πυθίη οὐκ ἔφη χρήσειν said she would not.., Hdt.1.19, cf. 8.2;

    οὐκ ἔφασαν ἐπιτρέψαι Lys.13.15

    , 47 (leg. - τρέψειν): c. acc. et inf.,

    οὔ φημ' Ὀρέστην σ' ἐνδίκως ἀνδρηλατεῖν A.Eu. 221

    , cf. Hdt.2.63: abs., κἂν μὲν μὴ φῇ if he says no, Ar.Av. 555 (anap.); ἢ φάθι ἢ μὴ ἃ ἐρωτῶ answer me yes or no, Pl.Grg. 475e; so in answers, φημί or

    οὕτως φημί

    yes,

    Id.Phdr. 270c

    , al., Grg. 500e; οὐκ ἔφη he said no, Id.Phd. 118a.— In this sense [dialect] Att. writers, besides [tense] pres., mostly use [tense] fut. φήσω and [tense] aor. ἔφησα, but in [tense] impf., inf., and part. [tense] pres., to avoid ambiguity, they prefer ἔφασκον, φάσκειν, φάσκων (v. φάσκω): φάναι is distd. fr. φάσκειν, e.g. ἔφη σπουδάζειν he said he was in haste, ἔφασκε σπουδάζειν he alleged he was in haste; but ἔφησθα is found in this sense, X.An.1.6.7.
    IV command, order,

    ἔφην τῷ Ὀρθοβούλῳ ἐξαλεῖψαί με Lys.16.13

    (so ἔφασαν, v. l. for ἔφρασαν in X.Cyr.4.6.11).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φημί

  • 11 μέν

    μέν, Particle, used partly to express certainty on the part of the speaker or writer; partly, and more commonly, to point out that the word or clause with which it stands is correlative to another word or clause that is to follow, the latter word or clause being introduced by δέ.
    A
    I μέν used absolutely to express certainty, not followed by correlative δέ, indeed, of a truth, synonymous with μήν, as appears from the [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. form ἦ μέν in protestations and oaths (where [dialect] Att. used ἦ μήν)

    , καί μοι ὄμοσσον, ἦ μ. μοι πρόφρων ἔπεσιν καὶ χερσὶν ἀρήξειν Il.1.77

    , cf. 14.275;

    ἦ μέν τοι τάδε πάντα τελείεται Od.14.160

    , cf. Il.24.416;

    τοῦτον ἐξορκοῖ, ἦ μέν οἱ διηκονήσειν Hdt.4.154

    , cf. 5.93, etc.: with neg.,

    οὐ μὲν γάρ τι κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392

    , etc.;

    ὤμοσα, μὴ μὲν.. ἀναφῆναι 4.254

    , cf. Hdt.2.118, 179;

    ἔξαρνος ἦν, μὴ μὲν ἀποκτεῖναι Id.3.67

    , cf. 99: without neg.,

    ἀνδρὸς μὲν τόδε σῆμα πάλαι κατατεθνηῶτος Il.7.89

    : also in Trag.,

    ἀκτὴ μὲν ἥδε τῆς περιρρύτου χθονός S.Ph.1

    , cf. 159 (anap.), OC44, E.Med. 676, 1129, etc.;

    καὶ μέν Il.1.269

    , 9.632, etc.; οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδὲ .. 2.703, 12.212; γε μέν, cf. γε 1.5.
    2 an answering clause with δέ is sts. implied, τὴν μὲν ἐγὼ σπουδῇ δάμνημ' ἐπέεσσι her can I hardly subdue, [ but all others easily], Il.5.893; ὡς μὲν λέγουσι as indeed they say, [ but as I believe not], E.Or. 8; καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἦν αὐτῷ πόλεμος (with no ἔπειτα δέ to follow), X. An.1.9.14; so νῦν μέν σ' ἀφήσω I will let you go this time, Herod.5.81: to give force to assertions made by a person respecting himself, wherein opposition to other persons is implied,

    ὡς μὲν ἐμῷ θυμῷ δοκεῖ Od. 13.154

    ; δοκεῖν μέν μοι ἥξει τήμερον [τὸ πλοῖον] Pl.Cri. 43d: hence with the pers. Pron.,

    ἐγὼ μέν νυν θεοῖσι ἔχω χάριν Hdt.1.71

    ; ἐγὼ μὲν οὐδέν (sc. θέλω) S.Ant. 498;

    ἐμοῦ μὲν οὐχ ἑκόντος Id.Aj. 455

    ;

    ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδα X.Cyr.1.4.12

    , cf. 4.2.45, etc.: with the demonstr. Pron.,

    τούτου μὲν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐγὼ σοφώτερός εἰμι Pl.Ap. 21d

    : generally, to emphasize the preceding word, πολλὴ μὲν ἡ μεταβολή μοι γέγονεν great indeed has been the change, Is.1.1, cf. Simon.5.1, etc.
    3 μέν is used alone in questions, when the answer is assumed, I take it, θέμις μὲν ἡμᾶς χρησμὸν εἰδέναι θεοῦ; E.Med. 676, cf. Ion 520 (troch.), Hipp. 316, S.Ant. 634, Ar.Av. 1214; Ἕλλην μέν ἐστι καὶ Ἑλληνίζει; Pl.Men. 82b.
    II μέν folld. by δέ in the correlative clause or clauses, on the one hand, on the other hand; commonly in Classical Gr., less freq. in later Gr. (rare in NT):
    1 μέν.., δέ .. (or when the correlative clause is neg., μέν.., οὐδέ .., Il.1.318, 536), to mark opposition, Hom., etc.—The opposed clauses commonly stand together, but are freq. separated by clauses, parenthetic or explanatory; e.g. μέν in Il.2.494 is answered by δέ in 511, 527 sq.; in X.An.1.9.2, πρῶτον μέν is answered by ἐπεὶ δέ in <*> 6; in Id.Mem.1.1.2, πρῶτον μέν is answered by θαυμαστὸν δέ in 1.2.1.
    2 to connect a series of clauses containing different matter, though with no opposition, Il.1.18sq., 306 sq. (five δέ-clauses), 433 sq. (eight δέ-clauses), cf. X.An. 1.3.14,7.10sq.: freq. when the members of a group or class are distinctly specified, παῖδες δύο, πρεσβύτερος μὲν Ἀρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος ib.1.1.1; τάφρος.., τὸ μὲν εὖρος ὀργυιαὶ πέντε, τὸ δὲ βάθος ὀργυιαὶ τρεῖς ib.1.7.14; πρῶτος μέν.., δεύτερος δέ.., τρίτος δέ .. ib.5.6.9; τότε μέν.., τότε δέ .., at one time.., at another.., ib.6.1.9, etc.: esp. with the Art. used as a Pron., ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. ; τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ .., etc.
    3 the principal word is freq. repeated,

    οἳ περὶ μὲν βουλὴν Δαναῶν, περὶ δ' ἐστὲ μάχεσθαι Il.1.258

    , cf. 288, Od.15.70;

    ἔνι μὲν φιλότης, ἐν δ' ἵμερος, ἐν δ' ὀαριστύς Il.14.216

    ;

    Ξέρξης μὲν ἄγαγεν.., Ξέρξης δ' ἀπώλεσεν A.Pers. 550

    , cf. 560, 694, 700 (all lyr.);

    χαλεπαίνει μὲν πρῳρεύς, χαλεπαίνει δὲ κυβερνήτης X.An.5.8.20

    .
    4 one of the correlative clauses is sts. independent, while the other takes the part. or some other dependent form, ἐβλασφήμει κατ' ἐμοῦ.., μάρτυρα μὲν.. οὐδένα παρασχόμενος.., παρεκελεύετο δέ .. D.57.11;

    οἱ ἀμφὶ βασιλέα, πεζοὶ μὲν οὐκέτι, τῶν δὲ ἱππέων ὁ λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη X.An.1.10.12

    , cf. 2.1.7, 5.6.29;

    ὧν ἐπιμεμφομένα σ' ἁδεῖα μὲν ἀντία δ' οἴσω S.Tr. 123

    , cf. OC 522 (bothlyr.);

    χωρὶς μὲν τοῦ ἐστερῆσθαι.., ἔτι δὲ καὶ.. δόξω ἀμελῆσαι Pl.Cri.44

    b.
    5 μέν and δέ freq. oppose two clauses, whereof one is subordinate to the other in meaning or emphasis, ἀλλ' ἐκεῖνο θαυμάζω, εἰ Λακεδαιμονίοις μέν ποτε.. ἀντήρατε,.. νυνὶ δὲ ὀκνεῖτ' ἐξιέναι (for εἰ.. ἀντάραντες νυνὶ ὀκνεῖτε) D.2.24, cf. E.IT 116, Lys.34.11, X.Mem.2.7.11, etc.: so in an anacoluthon, τρία μὲν ὄντα.. ναυτικά.., τούτων δ' εἰ περιόψεσθε τὰ δύο, κτλ., Th.1.36.
    6 μέν is not always answered by δέ, but freq. by other equiv. Particles, as ἀλλά, Il.1.22 sq., 2.703 sq., Pi.O.9.1, A.Pers. 176, X.An.1.7.17:—by μέντοι, Hdt.1.36, S.Ph. 350, D.21.189, etc.:—by ἀτάρ, Il.6.84, 124, A.Pr. 342, S.OT 1051sq., Pl. Tht. 172c, etc. (so μέν.., αὐτάρ in [dialect] Ep., Il.1.50, Od.19.513, etc.):— by αὖ, Il.11.108, Od.4.210:—by αὖθις, S.Ant. 165:—by αὖτε, Il.1.234, Od.22.5:—by temporal Particles, πρῶτα μέν.., εἶτα .. S.El. 261; πρῶτον μέν.., μετὰ τοῦτο .. X.An.6.1.5-7; μάλιστα μὲν δὴ.., ἔπειτα μέντοι .. S.Ph. 350, cf. OT 647:—rarely by μήν with neg.,

    οὐδὲν μὴν κωλύει Pl.Phdr. 268e

    ;

    οὐ μὴν αὐταί γε Id.Phlb. 12d

    .
    b when the opposition is emphatic, δέ is sts. strengthd., as ὅμως δέ .. S.OT 785, Ph. 473, 1074, etc. (so

    ἀλλ' ὅμως El. 450

    ); δ' αὖ .. Il.4.415, X.An.1.10.5; δ' ἔμπης .. Il.1.561-2.
    c μέν is sts. answered by a copul. Particle, κάρτιστοι μὲν ἔσαν καὶ καρτίστοις ἐμάχοντο ib. 267, cf. 459, Od. 22.475, S.Aj.1, Tr. 689, E.Med. 125 (anap.), etc.: rarely in Prose,

    τρία μὲν ἔτη ἀντεῖχον.., καὶ οὐ πρότερον ἐνέδοσαν Th.2.65

    (dub.).
    B μέν before other Particles:
    I where each Particle retains its force,
    1 μὲν ἄρα, in Hom. μέν ῥα, Il.2.1, 6.312, Od.1.127, Pl. Phdr. 258d, R. 467d, etc.
    2

    μὲν γάρ S.OT62

    , Th.1.142, etc.:— in Hom. there is freq. no second clause, Od.1.173, 392, cf. S.OT 1062, etc.;

    μὲν γὰρ δή Il.11.825

    ;

    μὲν γάρ τε 17.727

    .
    3 μέν γε, when a general statement is explained in detail,

    Κορινθίοις μέν γε ἔνσπονδοί ἐστε Th.1.40

    , cf. 70, 6.86, Hdt.6.46, Antipho 5.14, Lys. 13.27, Is.4.8, Ar.Nu. 1382, V. 564, E.Fr.909.4.
    4

    μὲν δή Il.1.514

    , Hdt.1.32, etc.: freq. used to express positive certainty,

    ἀλλ' οἶσθα μὲν δή S. Tr. 627

    , cf. OT 294;

    τὰ μὲν δὴ τόξ' ἔχεις Id.Ph. 1308

    ; esp. as a conclusion,

    τοῦτο μὲν δὴ.. ὁμολογεῖται Pl.Grg. 470b

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.1.6, etc.: in closing a statement,

    τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα A.Pr. 500

    , etc.: used in answers to convey full assent, ἦ μὲν δή (cf. supr. A) Il.9.348, Od.4.33;

    καὶ μὲν δή.. γε Pl.R. 409b

    ; οὐ μὲν δή, to deny positively, Il.8.238, X.Cyr.1.6.9, Pl.Tht. 148e, etc.;

    οὐ μὲν δή.. γε X.An.2.2.3

    , 3.2.14; ἀλλ' οὔ τι μὲν δή .. Pl.Tht. 187a.
    5 μὲν οὖν, v. infr.11.2.
    II where the Particles combine so as to form a new sense,
    1 μέν γε at all events, at any rate (not in Trag.),

    τοῦτο μέν γ' ἤδη σαφές Ar.Ach. 154

    , cf. Nu. 1172, Lys. 1165, Ra.80, Th.3.39;

    μέν γέ που Pl.R. 559b

    , Tht. 147a.
    2 μὲν οὖν is freq. used with a corresponding δέ, so that each Particle retains its force, Od.4.780, Pi.O.1.111, S.OT 244, 843; Ph. 359, D.2.5, etc.: but freq. also abs., so then, S.Ant.65;

    ταῦτα μὲν οὖν παραλείψω D.2.3

    ; esp. in replies, sts. in strong affirmation,

    παντάπασι μὲν οὖν Pl.Tht. 158d

    ; κομιδῇ μὲν οὖν ib. 159e; πάνυ μὲν οὖν ib. 159b; ἀνάγκη μὲν οὖν ib. 189e; also to substitute a new statement so as to correct a preceding statement, nay rather, κακοδαίμων; Answ. βαρυδαίμων μὲν οὖν! Ar.Ec. 1102; μου πρὸς τὴν κεφαλὴν ἀποψῶ wipe your nose on my head: Answ. ἐμοῦ μὲν οὖν .. nay on mine, Id.Eq. 911, cf. A.Pers. 1032 (lyr.), Ag. 1090 (lyr.), 1396, S.Aj. 1363, El. 1503, OT 705, Ar.Ra. 241, Pl.Cri. 44b, Grg. 466a, 470b, Prt. 309d, etc.; also

    μὲν οὖν δή S.Tr. 153

    ;

    καὶ δὴ μὲν οὖν Id.OC31

    ; cf. οὐμενοῦν: in NT μενοῦν and μενοῦνγε, to begin a sentence, yea rather, Ev.Luc.11.28, Ep.Rom.9.20, etc., cf. Phryn.322, Hsch.—In [dialect] Ion., μέν νυν is used for μὲν οὖν, Hdt.1.18, 4.145, etc.
    3 by μέν τε, if δέ τε follows, the two clauses are more closely combined than by τε.., τε .., Il.5.139, al.; μέν τε is freq. answered by δέ alone, 16.28, al.; by ἀλλά, αὐτάρ, 17.727, Od.1.215, al.; perh. by ἠδέ, Il.4.341:— Hom. also uses μέν τε abs., when τε loses its force, as after ἦ, τίς, etc., Il.2.145, al.
    4 μέν τοι in Hom. always occurs in speeches, where τοι can be regarded as the dat. of the Pron.: later, μέντοι is written as a single word, and is used:
    a with a conj. force, yet, nevertheless, A.Pr. 320, 1054 (anap.), S.Tr. 413, etc.; and sts. stands for δέ, answering to μέν, v. supr. A.11.6 a.
    b as an Adv., in strong protestations, οὐ μέντοι μὰ Δία .. D.4.49; in eager or positive assent, of course, φαμέν τι εἶναι .. ; Answ.

    φαμὲν μέντοι νὴ Δία Pl.Phd. 65d

    , al.: with a neg. to give emphasis to a question, οὐ σὺ μέντοι .. ; why, are you not.. ? Id.Prt. 309a, cf. Phdr. 229b, R. 339b, etc.: sts. to express impatience, ὄμνυμι γάρ σοι—τίνα μέντοι, τίνα θεῶν; Id.Phdr. 236d; τί μ. πρῶτον ἦν, τί πρῶτον ἦν; nay what was the first? Ar.Nu. 787;

    οὗτος, σὲ λέγω μ. Id.Ra. 171

    ; σὺ μέντοι .. Luc.Alex.44: with imper., to enforce the command, τουτὶ μ. σὺ φυλάττου only take heed.., Ar. Pax 1100, cf.Av. 661, X.An.1.4.8: in answers, γελοῖον μέντἂν εἴη nay it would be absurd, Pl.Tht. 158e; summing up a long temporal clause, And.1.130.
    c

    μέντοι γε X.Cyr.5.5.24

    , etc.;

    οὐ μ. γε Diog.Apoll.5

    : in later Gr. μέντοιγε stands first in the sentence,

    μ. οὐ θέλω PLond.3.897.13

    (i A.D.); also

    γε μέντοι A.Ag. 938

    , S.OT 778, 1292, E.Hec. 600;

    ὅμως γε μ. Ar.Ra.61

    .
    d καὶ μ. καί is used to add a point to be noted, Heraclit.28, Pl.R. 331d; also καί.. μ., νῦν σοι καιρός ἐστιν ἐπιδείξασθαι τὴν παιδείαν, καὶ φυλάξασθαι μέντοι .. and of course to take care.., X.An.4.6.15 (v.l.), cf. 1.8.20, Pl.Prt. 339c, Tht. 143a.
    e ἀλλὰ μέντοι well, if it comes to that, X.An.4.6.16; well, of course, Pl.R. 331e, etc.; cf. μέντον.
    C for μέν after other Particles, see each Particle.
    D Position of μέν. Like δέ, it usu. stands as the second word in a sentence. But when a sentence begins with words common to its subordinate clauses, μέν stands second in the first of these clauses, as

    ἥδε γὰρ γυνὴ δούλη μέν, εἴρηκεν δ' ἐλεύθερον λόγον S.Tr.63

    ; οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι ἐτάξαντο μέν.., ἡσύχαζον δέ .. Th.4.73, cf. 113, etc. It also attaches itself to words which mark opposition, as πρῶτον μέν, τότε μέν, ἐγὼ μέν, even when these do not stand first: sts. however it precedes them,

    ὡς μὲν ἐγὼ οἶμαι Pl.Phdr. 228b

    ;

    ὡς μέν τινες ἔφασαν X.Cyr.5.2.28

    . It generally stands between the Art. and Noun, or the Prep. and its Case: but if special stress is laid on the Noun, this is sts. neglected, as

    οἱ Τεγεᾶται μὲν ἐπηυλίσαντο, Μαντινῆς δὲ ἀπεχώρησαν Th.4.134

    ; ἀνὰ τὸ σκοτεινὸν μέν .. Id.3.22; also

    τῇ σῇ μὲν εὐδαιμονίῃ, τῇ ἐμεωυτοῦ δὲ κακοδαιμονίῃ Hdt. 1.87

    .
    II μέν is freq. repeated:
    1 when, besides the opposition of two main clauses, a subordinate opposition is introduced into the first, ὁ μὲν ἀνὴρ τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει, ὑμῶν δέ .. X.An.1.6.9, cf. 5.8.24, Th.8.104, D.18.214, 23.208.
    2 in apodosi with the demonstr. Pron. or Adv., τὸν μὲν καλέουσι θέρος, τοῦτον μὲν προσκυνέουσι, τὸν δὲ χειμῶνα .. Hdt.2.121; ὅσοι μὲν δὴ νομοῦ τοῦ Θηβαίου εἰσί, οὗτοι μέν [νυν].. αἶγας θύουσι· ὅσοι δὲ.. νομοῦ τοῦ Μενδησίου εἰσί, οὗτοι δὲ.. ὄϊς θύουσι ib.42, cf.3.108, al.; ὅτε μέν με οἱ ἄρχοντες ἔταττον.., τότε μὲν ἔμενον.., τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ τάττοντος,.. ἐνταῦθα δέ .. Pl.Ap. 28e, cf. Grg. 512a.
    3 μέν used absolutely is freq. folld. by a correlative

    μέν, εἰ μὲν οὖν ἡμεῖς μὲν.. ποιοῦμεν Id.R. 421a

    .
    III μέν is sts. omitted (esp. in Poetry) where it is implied in the following

    δέ, φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων Il.22.157

    ;

    ἐλευθεροῦτε πατρίδ', ἐλευθεροῦτε δὲ παῖδας A. Pers. 403

    ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf. Ar.Nu. 396, Pl.Sph. 221e, Arist.Po. 1447b14, etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μέν

  • 12

    , [full] , τό, is, when thus written,
    A demonstr. Pronoun.
    B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.
    C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., , , οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but , , οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual

    τοῖιν Od.18.34

    , al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ;

    οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404

    (anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ;

    τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11

    ;

    τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18

    ;

    τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e

    ;

    τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e

    ;

    τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75

    (τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484,

    ταῖν Lys.19.17

    , Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem.,

    μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8

    (Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. , ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With , ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)
    A , , τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):
    I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun,

    αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105

    ;

    τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186

    , cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.
    II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it,

    ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12

    , al.
    III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ;

    θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43

    , cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.
    IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.
    V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.
    VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,

    ὁ δέ

    the former,

    Pl.Prt. 359e

    , Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts,

    ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595

    ;

    τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d

    , etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition,

    ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28

    , cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ;

    πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c

    ; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg.,

    ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6

    : sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or

    ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317

    -19, cf. 116 ;

    τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.
    2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g.

    τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24

    ;

    τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b

    ;

    οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a

    , etc.
    3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which refers is left indefinite,

    ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41

    ;

    νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c

    , cf. Phlb. 13c.
    4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.
    5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding

    ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3

    , cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by

    ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304

    ; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ;

    τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843

    , etc. ;

    ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205

    (v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf.

    μέν D.

    III ;

    γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d

    , cf. Tht. 181d.
    6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause,

    τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491

    ;

    τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3

    , cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87

    ;

    ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6

    : this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.
    7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.
    VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,
    1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v.

    ὅς A.

    II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc.,

    καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt.,

    καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61

    , al.
    2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such,

    τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b

    : but mostly in acc.,

    καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ;

    τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141

    , cf. 9.68 ;

    τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243

    ; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad,

    τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398

    , cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.;

    τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53

    ; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.
    VIII abs. usages of single cases,
    1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose,

    τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12

    .
    b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ;

    τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46

    ;

    δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210

    :—only poet.
    c of Manner,

    τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν

    in this way, thus,

    Od.8.510

    .
    d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without

    μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48

    .
    e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.
    2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose,

    τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d

    , Sph. 230b.
    b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.
    3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6),

    τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37

    ;

    τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89

    ; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.
    4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also

    τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14

    ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14

    ;

    τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90

    : sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause,

    τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107

    ,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.
    5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.
    b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.;

    ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32

    , cf. A.Eu. 462 ;

    τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59

    .
    6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs.,

    ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90

    , Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.;

    ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71

    ;

    τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c

    : in late Prose, also with Positives,

    ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47

    codd.; with

    πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19

    , cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).
    B , , τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,

    αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον

    the hindmost man,

    Il.11.178

    ;

    τὸν ἄριστον 17.80

    ;

    τὸν δύστηνον 22.59

    ;

    τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325

    ; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in

    τῶν ἄλλων 2.674

    , al.: with Advs.,

    τὸ πρίν 24.543

    , al.;

    τὸ πάρος περ 17.720

    ;

    τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583

    ; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ;

    τὰ πρῶτα 1.6

    ,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ;

    ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559

    .—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.
    I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron.,

    τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5

    ; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12;

    οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b

    .
    b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).
    c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.
    d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.
    2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type,

    οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109

    ;

    πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242

    , etc.
    b freq. with abstract Nouns,

    ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45

    , etc.
    3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.
    4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.
    5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.;

    τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148

    ; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.
    6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ;

    τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b

    ;

    ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d

    , cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ;

    ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8

    ;

    τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8

    : hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.
    7 before Prons.,
    a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc.,

    τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a

    ,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ;

    τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a

    ; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.
    b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.
    c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,

    ὁ τοιοῦτος

    that sort of person,

    X.Mem.4.2.21

    , etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art.,

    τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13

    .
    8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    πολύς 11.3

    , etc.
    9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.
    II elliptic expressions:
    1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.
    2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers.,

    τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48

    . But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as

    τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86

    ; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.
    3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.
    4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.
    5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as , , τὸ νῦν;

    ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52

    ; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as

    κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266

    , cf.[315] (lyr.);

    ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412

    (lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ;

    τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731

    .
    C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as

    κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262

    , cf. 1.300, al. ;

    Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526

    (lyr.);

    Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86

    ; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets,

    ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3

    , cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag.,

    τῆς S.OC 1258

    , Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.);

    τῷ S.Ph.14

    ;

    τήν Id.OC 747

    , Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg.

    τεῦ Il.18.192

    (s.v.l.).
    D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:
    a [dialect] Att. , , τό, with [pron. full] make , as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: , τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: , τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: , τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.
    b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from

    ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65

    , ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from

    ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60

    , etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) >

  • 13 ὅς

    ὅς [(A)], ἥ, ὅ, gen. οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc. ; dat. pl. οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, gen. ὅου (prob. replacing Οο) in the phrases
    A

    ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ' ὀλεῖται Il.2.325

    , h.Ap. 156 ;

    ὅου κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον Od.1.70

    (elsewh.

    οὗ Il. 7.325

    , al., never οἷο); fem.

    ἕης Il.16.208

    (perh. imitation of ὅου; elsewh. only

    ἧς 5.265

    , al.); dat. pl. οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in Hom.):—Pron. used,
    A as demonstr. by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Art. , , τό : in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.
    B as a Relat. by the side of the Art. ὅ, ἥ, τό (v. , , τό, c):—this demonstr. and Relat. Pron. must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Skt. Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lith. jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she, it).)
    A DEMONSTR. PRON., = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that; also, he, she, it:
    I Homeric usage: this form only occurs in the nom. masc. and neut. ὅς, ὅ, and perh. nom. fem. and nom. pl. οἵ, the other cases being supplied by , , τό ([etym.] ὅ, ἡ, τό); most codd. have in Il.17.551, Od. 24.255, al., and this (as also οἵ ) can be referred equally to either (on the accent v. , , τό): with γάρ or

    καί, ὃς γὰρ δεύτατος ἦλθεν 1.286

    ;

    ἀλλὰ καὶ ὃς δείδοικε Il.21.198

    ;

    ὃ γὰρ γέρας ἐστὶ θανόντων Od.24.190

    , Il.23.9, cf. 12.344 : freq. used emphatically in apodosi, mostly with οὐδέ or μηδέ before it,

    μηδ' ὅν τινα γαστέρι μήτηρ κοῦρον ἐόντα φέροι, μηδ' ὃς φύγοι Il.6.59

    , cf. 7.160, Od.4.653 : after a part., εἰς ἕτερον γάρ τίς τε ἰδών.., ὃς σπεύδει (for ὅστις ἂν ἴδῃ, ὃς σπεύδει) Hes.Op.22.
    II in later Gr. this usage remained in a few forms:
    1 at the beginning of a clause, καὶ ὅς and he, Hdt.7.18, X.Smp.1.15, Pl. Phd. 118, Prt. 310d ; καὶ ἥ and she, καὶ οἵ and they, Hdt.8.56,87, Pl. Smp. 201e, X.An.7.6.4.
    2

    ὃς καὶ ὅς

    such and such a person,

    Hdt.4.68

    :—here also the Art. supplied the obl. cases.
    3 ἦ δ' ὅς, ἦ δ' ἥ, said he, said she, v. ἠμί.
    4 in oppositions, where it sts. answers to the Art.,

    Λέριοι κακοί· οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ' οὔ.. Phoc.1

    ;

    ὃς μὲν.., ὃ δὲ.. Mosch.3.76

    ;

    ὃ μὲν.., ὃς δὲ.., ὃ δὲ.., ὃς δὲ.. Bion 1.81

    ; so

    τῷ μὲν.., ᾧ δὲ.., ᾧ δὲ.. AP6.187

    (Alph.); ὃ μὲν.., ὃ δὲ.., ὃ δὲ.. (neut.) Ev.Matt.13.8 ;

    ἂ μὲν.., ἃ δὲ.. Heraclit.102

    , Archyt. ap. Stob.3.1.110 ;

    ὧν μὲν.., ὧν δὲ.. Philem.99

    ;

    πόλεις ἃς μὲν.., ἃς δὲ.. D.18.71

    (as v. l.): so in [dialect] Dor. dat. fem. as Adv.,

    ᾇ μὲν.., ᾇ δὲ.. Tab.Heracl.1.81

    ;

    ἐφ' ὧν μὲν.., ἐφ' ὧν δὲ.. Arist.EN 1109a1

    : very freq. in late Prose, Arr.Epict.3.25.1, etc.: also answering to other Prons.,

    ἑτέρων.., ὧν δὲ.. Philem.31.6

    ;

    ἐφ' ᾧ μὲν.., ἐπὶ θατέρῳ δὲ.. Arist. HA 564a21

    , etc.
    B RELAT. PRON., who, which.—By the side of the simple Relat., ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (in Hom. also , , τό), we find in common use the compd. forms ὅστε, ὅστις and ὅτις, ὅσπερ and ὅπερ, ὅς γε (q. v.).
    0-0USAGE of the Relat. Pron. (the foll. remarks apply to ὅς γε, ὅσπερ, ὅστε, ὅστις, as well as to ὅς, and to , , τό as relat.):
    I in respect of CONCORD.—Prop. it agrees in gender and number with the Noun or Pron. in the antec. clause.—But this rule admits of many exceptions:
    1 the Relat. mayagree with the gender implied, not expressed, in the antec.,

    φίλον θάλος, ὃν τέκον αὐτή Il.22.87

    ;

    τέκνων, οὓς ἤγαγε E.Supp.12

    : so after collective Nouns, the Relat. is freq. put in pl. in the gender implied in the Noun,

    λαόν.., οὕς.. Il.16.369

    ; στρατιάν.. τοιαύτην.., οἵ τινες.., τὸ ναυτικόν, οἵ.., Th.6.91,3.4 ;

    πλήθει, οἵπερ.. Pl.Phdr. 260a

    ; esp. after the names of countries or cities, Τηλέπυλον Λαιστρυγονίην ἀφίκανεν, οἳ.. (i. e. to Telepylos of the Laestrygonians, who..) Od.23.319 ;

    τὰς Ἀθήνας, οἵ γε.. Hdt.7.8

    .

    β' ; Μέγαρα.., οὓς.. Th.6.94

    : it also may agree with the Noun or Pron. implied in an Adj., Θηβαίας ἐπισκοποῦντ' ἀγυιάς, τάν.. the streets of Thebes, which.., S.Ant. 1137 (lyr.); τοὺς Ἡρακλείους παῖδας, ὃς.. the children of Heracles, who.., E.HF 157;

    τῆς ἐμῆς ἐπεισόδου, ὅν..

    of me whom..,

    S.OC 731

    ; τὸν ἥμισύν ἐστ' ἀτελὴς τοῦ χρόνου· εἶθ' ἧς πᾶσι μέτεστι.., where ἧς agrees with ἀτελείας implied in ἀτελής, D.20.8.
    2 when the antec. Noun in sg. implies a class, the Relat. is sts. in pl., ἦ μάλα τις θεὸς ἔνδον, οἳ.. ἔχουσιν (for τις θεῶν, οἵ.. ) Od.19.40 ;

    κῆτος, ἃ μυρία βόσκει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη

    one of the thousands, which..,

    12.97

    ;

    αὐτουργός, οἵπερ..

    one of those who..,

    E.Or. 920

    : rare in Prose,

    ἀνὴρ καλός τε κἀγαθός, ἐν οἷς οὐδαμοῦ σὺ φανήσει γεγονώς D.18.310

    , cf. Lys.1.32.
    3 reversely, the sg. Relat. may follow a pl. antec., where the relat. clause refers to each individual ; but in this case ὅστις or ὃς ἄν is mostly used, ἀνθρώπους τίνυσθον, ὅ τις κ' ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσῃ, for ἀνθρώπων τινά, ὅς κε.., Il.3.279 ; πάντα.., ὅ τι νοοίης, i.e. anything which.., Ar.Nu. 1381 : rarely ὅς alone, τὰ λίνεα [ ὅπλα], τοῦ τάλαντον ὁ πῆχυς εἷλκε a cubit's length where of.., Hdt.7.36.
    4 the Relat. is sts. in the neut., agreeing rather with the notion implied in the antec. than with the Noun itself, διὰ τὴν πλεονεξίαν, ὃ πᾶσα φύσις διώκειν πέφυκεν for profit's sake—a thing which.., Pl.R. 359c, cf. Lg. 849d;

    τοὺς Φωκέας, ὃ σιωπᾶν εἰκὸς ἦν

    a name which..,

    D.19.44

    ; γυναῖκας, ἐφ' ὅπερ.. women, for dealings with whom, E.Ba. 454.
    5 with Verbs of naming, the Relat. freq. agrees with the name added as a predicate, rather than with the antec.,

    ξίφος, τὸν ἀκινάκην καλέουσι Hdt.7.54

    ;

    τὴν ἄκρην, αἳ καλεῦνται Κληΐδες Id.5.108

    , cf. 2.17, 124, etc.
    II in respect of CONSTRUCTION.—Prop., the Relat. is governed by the Noun or Verb in its own clause.—But it is freq. thrown by attraction into the case of the antec. (prob. not in Hom., ἧς in Il.5.265, cf. 23.649, can be expld. otherwise), ἀπὸ παιδεύσιος, τῆς ἐπεπαίδευτο (for τῇ or τήν) Hdt.4.78; freq. in [dialect] Att., Th.7.21, etc.: esp. where a Demonstr. Pron. is unexpressed, while the Relat. takes its case, οὐδὲν ὧν λέγω (for οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ λ.) S.El. 1048, 1220, etc.; ξὺν ᾧπερ εἶχον οἰκετῶν (for ξὺν τούτῳ ὅνπερ) Id.OC 334 ; ἀνθ' ὧν ἂν ἐμοὶ δανείσῃς (for ἀντὶ τούτων ἅ.. ) X.Cyr.3.1.34 ; πρὸς οἷς ἐκτήσαντο (for πρὸς τούτοις ἅ.. ) Pl.Grg. 519a, etc.: the Demonstr. Pron. sts follows,

    ἀφ' ὧν ἐγένεσθε ἀγαθοί, ἀπὸ τούτων ὠφελεῖσθαι Th.3.64

    , cf. D.8.23,26.—This attraction is rare, exc. when the acc. passes into the gen. or dat. (v. supr.): sts. nom. is so attracted, οὐδὲν εἰδότες τῶν ἦν (for τούτων ἃ ἦν) Hdt.1.78; ἀφ' ὧν παρεσκεύασται (for ἀπὸ τούτων ἃ π.) Th.7.67: also dat., ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς (for τούτων οἷς.. ) Pl.Grg. 509a.
    b reversely the antec. passes into the case of the Relat., φυλακὰς δ' ἃς εἴρεαι.., οὔτις (for φυλακῶν.. οὔτις) Il.10.416; τὰς στήλας, τὰς ἵστα, αἱ πλεῦνες.. (for τῶν στηλῶν.. αἱ πλεῦνες) Hdt.2.106: so also when the Noun follows the Relat. clause, it may be put in apposition with the Relat.,

    Κύκλωπος κεχόλωται, ὃν ὀφθαλμοῦ ἀλάωσεν, ἀντίθεον Πολύφημον Od.1.69

    , cf. 4.11, Il.3.123, A.Th. 553, E.Hec. 771, 986, Hipp. 101, etc.
    2 the Demonstr. Pron. or the Noun with an Art. is sts. transferred to the Relat. clause, Ἰνδὸν ποταμόν, ὃς κροκοδείλους δεύτερος οὗτος.. παρέχεται the river Indus, being the second river which.., Hdt.4.44;

    σφραγῖδα.., ἣν ἐπὶ δέλτῳ τήνδε κομίζεις E.IA 156

    (anap.);

    φοβούμεθα δέ γε.. δόξαν.., ὃν δὴ καὶ καλοῦμεν τὸν φόβον ἡμεῖς γε αἰσχύνην Pl.Lg. 647a

    .
    3 the Relat. in all cases may govern a partit. gen., ἀθανάτων ὅς τίς σε.. any one of the immortals who.., Od.15.35, cf. 25,5.448, etc.;

    οἳ.. τῶν ἀστῶν Hdt.7.170

    ;

    οὓς.. βαρβάρων A.Pers. 475

    ;

    ᾧ.. τῶν ἡνιόχων Pl. Phdr. 247b

    : freq. in neut., ἐς ὃ δυνάμιος to what a height of power, Hdt.7.50 ; οἶσθ' οὖν ὃ κάμνει τοῦ λόγου; what part of thy speech, E. Ion 363; ᾧπερ τῆς τέχνης ἐπίστευον in which particular of their art.., Th. 7.36 ; τὰ μακρὰ τείχη, ἃ σφῶν.. εἶχον which portion of their territory, Id.4.109, etc.: rarely in such forms as ἕξουσι δ' ἣν λάβωσιν ἐν ταφῇ χθονός (for ὃ χθονός) A.Th. 819 ( χθόνα cj. Brunck).
    III in respect of the Moods which follow the Relat.:
    1 when the Relat. is equivalent to καί + demonstr. (ὅς = and he..) any mood may follow which may be found in independent clauses: ἦλθε τὸ ναυτικὸν τὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, ὃ τίς οὐκ ἂν ἰδὼν ἐφοβήθη; Lys.2.34 ;

    ὁ δ' εἰς τὸ σῶφρον ἐπ' ἀρετήν τ' ἄγων ἔρως ζηλωτὸς ἀνθρώποισιν· ὧν εἴην ἐγώ E.Fr. 672

    ;

    ἐλπίς, ᾗ μόνῃ σωθεῖμεν ἄν Id.Hel. 815

    ; εἰς καλὸν ἡμῖν Ἄνυτος ὅδε παρεκαθέζετο, ᾧ μεταδῶμεν τῆς σκέψεως to whom let us.., Pl.Men. 89e ; ὃν ὑμεῖς.. νομίσατε which I would have you think.., Lys.19.61: so the inf. in orat. obliq., ἔτι δὲ.. προσετίθει χρήματα οὐκ ὀλίγα, οἷς χρήσεσθαι αὐτούς (sc. ἔφη) Th.2.13: for the inf. after ἐφ' ᾧ τε, v. ἐπί B. 111.3.
    2 after ὅς, ὅστις, = whoever, in collective hypothetical sense (= if A + if B + if C..), the same moods are used as after εἰ:
    a [tense] pres. ind.,

    τῷδ' ἔφες ἀνδρὶ βέλος.. ὅς τις ὅδε κρατέει Il.5.175

    ;

    κλῦθι, ἄναξ, ὅτις ἐσσί Od.5.445

    ; δουληΐην.., ἥτις ἐστί (as we say) whatever it is, Hdt.6.12 ; ὅ τι ἀνὴρ καὶ γυνή ἐστι πλὴν παιδίων all that are man and woman, Id.2.60 ;

    Ζεύς, ὅστις ποτ' ἐστίν A.Ag. 160

    (lyr.): also after

    ὅς, ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὃς πενίῃ εἴκων ἀπατήλια βάζει Od.14.157

    , etc.
    b subj. with ἄν ([etym.] κεν) or, in poetry, without ἄν:

    ξυνίει ἔπος ὅττι κεν εἴπω 19.378

    ;

    οὐ δηναιὸς ὃς ἀθανάτοισι μάχηται Il.5.407

    :—in such cases the opt. is used after secondary tenses,

    Τρῶας ἄμυνε νεῶν, ὅς τις φέροι ἀκάματον πῦρ 15.731

    , cf. Hes.Sc. 480 ;

    πάντας ἑξῆς, ὅτῳ ἐντύχοιεν,.. κτείνοντες Th.7.29

    , cf. Pl.Ap. 21a, etc.
    c sts. opt. without ἄν after a primary tense,

    ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν S.Ant. 666

    ; after an opt.,

    ἔρδοι τις ἣν ἕκαστος εἰδείη τέχνην Ar.V. 1431

    .
    IV peculiar Idioms:
    1 in Homer and correct writers, when two coordinate Relat. clauses were joined by καί or δέ, the Relat. Pron. was freq. replaced in the second clause by the demonstr. even though the case was changed, ἄνδρα.., ὃς μέγα πάντων Ἀργείων κρατέει καί οἱ πείθονται Ἀχαιοί (for καὶ ᾧ) Il.1.78 ; ὅου κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον.. · Θόωσα δέ μιν τέκε νύμφη (for ὃν τέκε) Od.1.70, cf. 14.85, etc. ; and this sts. even without the demonstr. being expressed, δοίη δ' ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι καί οἱ κεχαρισμένος ἔλθοι (for καὶ ὅς οἱ) 2.54, cf. 114 ; οὕς κεν ἐΰ γνοίην καί τ' οὔνομα μυθησαίμην (for καὶ ὧν) Il.3.235 ; ᾗ χαλκὸς μὲν ὑπέστρωται, χαλκὸν δ' ἐπίεσται (nom. supplied) Orac. ap. Hdt.1.47 ;

    ἃς ἐπιστήμας μὲν προσείπομεν.., δέονται δὲ ὀνόματος ἄλλου Pl.R. 533d

    .
    2 the neut. of the Relat. is used in [dialect] Att. to introduce a clause qualifying the whole of the principal clause which follows: the latter clause is commonly introduced by γάρ, ὅτι, εἰ, ἐπειδή, etc.,

    ὃ δὲ δεινότατόν γ' ἐστὶν ἁπάντων, ὁ Ζεὺς γὰρ.. ἕστηκεν κτλ. Ar.Av. 514

    , cf. D.19.211, etc.;

    ὃ δὲ πάντων σχετλιώτατον, εἰ.. βουλευσόμεθα Isoc.6.56

    ;

    ὃ μὲν πάντων θαυμαστότατον ἀκοῦσαι, ὅτι.. Pl. R. 491b

    , cf.Ap. 18c: also without any Conj.,

    ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατόν ἐστι, τοιοῦτος ὢν κτλ. And.4.16

    ;

    ὃ δ' ἠπάτα σε πλεῖστον.., ηὔχεις κτλ. E.El. 938

    : c. inf.,

    ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατον, τὴν ἀδελφὴν ὑποδέξασθαι Lys.19.33

    (but ὑποδέξασθαι < δεῖ> is prob. cj.), etc.:—so also the neut. pl. may mean with reference to that which, ἃ δ'.. ἐστί σοι λελεγμένα, πᾶν κέρδος ἡγοῦ.. as to what has been said.., E.Med. 453, cf. Hdt.3.81, S.OT 216, Ar.Eq. 512, etc.
    3 in many instances the Gr. Relat. must be resolved into a Conj. and Pron., θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως (= ὅτι σὺ) X.Mem.2.7.13, cf. Lys.7.23 codd., Pl.Smp. 204b, etc.: very freq. in conditional clauses, for εἴ or

    ἐάν τις, βέλτερον ὃς... προφύγῃ κακόν, ἠὲ ἁλώῃ Il.14.81

    , cf. Hes.Op. 327 ;

    συμφορὰ δ', ὃς ἂν τύχῃ κακῆς γυναικός E.Fr. 1056

    ;

    τὸ δ' εὐτυχές, οἳ ἂν.. λάχωσι κτλ. Th.2.44

    ;

    τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ' εἶναι, ὃς ἂν τὴν πατρίδα ὠφελήσῃ Id.6.14

    .
    4 the Relat. freq. stands where we should use a final Conj. or the inf., ἄγγελον ἧκαν, ὃς ἀγγείλειε sent a messenger to tell.., Od. 15.458 ;

    κλητοὺς ὀτρύνομεν, οἵ κε τάχιστα ἔλθωσ'

    that they may..,

    Il. 9.165

    : and freq. with [tense] fut. ind., πρέσβεις ἄγουσα, οἵπερ φράσουσι (v.l. φράσωσι) to tell.., Th.7.25 ;

    πέμψον τιν', ὅστις σημανεῖ E.IT 1209

    (troch.), cf. X.HG2.3.2, Mem.2.1.14: so with [tense] fut. opt.,

    ὀργάνου, ᾧ τὴν τροφὴν δέξοιτο Pl.Ti. 33c

    : also for ὥστε, after οὕτω, ὧδε, etc., οὐκ ἔστιν οὕτω μῶρος, ὃς θανεῖν ἐρᾷ (for ὥστε ἐρᾶν) S.Ant. 220, cf. Hdt.4.52, E.Alc. 198, Ar.Ach. 737, etc.
    5 ὅς is freq. used where we should expect οἷος, as μαθὼν ὃς εἶ φύσιν what thou art, S.Aj. 1259, cf. E.Alc. 640, Pl. Euthd. 283d, etc.
    6 ὅς is sts. = ὅστις or τις in indirect clauses,

    γνώσῃ.. ὅς.. ἡγεμόνων κακὸς ἠδ' ὅς κ' ἐσθλὸς ἔῃσι Il.2.365

    (perh. felt as Relat.); ὃς ἦν ὁ ἀναδέξας, οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν I cannot tell who it was that.., Hdt.6.124 ;

    γενομένης λέσχης ὃς γένοιτο.. ἄριστος Id.9.71

    (in 4.131,6.37,7.37, τί θέλει ([etym.] θέλοι ) has been conjectured for τὸ of the Mss.); so in [dialect] Att.,

    ἐγῷδ' ὅς ἐστι, Κλεισθένης ὁ Σιβυρτίου Ar.Ach. 118

    , cf. 442, Av. 804, Pl.59, 369, S.OT 1068, OC 1171 ;

    πέμπει πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον, εἰπὼν ὃς ἦν X.Cyr.6.1.46

    , cf. D.52.7;

    δηλώσας ὃς ἦν Arist.Po. 1452a26

    ;

    γράψας παρ' οὗ κομιούμεθα PCair.Zen.150.11

    (iii B. C.).
    b later ὅς = τίς even in direct questions, ἐφ' ὃ πάρει ; Ev.Matt.26.50 ; ἣν δοκεῖς; Arr.Epict.4.1.120 (both dub.).
    7 in exclamations,

    ὦ Ἡράκλεις, ἃ πέπονθα Men.Epit. 146

    .     0-1A a. the Relat. Pron. joined with Particles or Conjs.:
    I ὅς γε, v. ὅσγε.
    II ὃς δή, v. δή 11.2 ; ὃν δήποτε τρόπον in some way or other, Arist.Metaph. 1090a6 ; ὁδήποτε, ἁδήποτε, anything or things whatever, Id.EN 1167a35, 1164a25 ; [full] ὁσδηποτοῦν, Euc.Phaen.p.10 M., Dsc.5.10, Jul.Or.1.18c, IG22.1121.30 (iv A. D.); [full] ὁσδηποτεοῦν, IGRom. 4.915 (Cibyra, i A. D.), IG22.1368.133 (ii A. D.); [full] ὁσδητισοῦν (in [dialect] Boeot. form ὁσδειτισῶν), ib.7.3081.5 (Lebad.) ; [full] ὁσποτοῦν, Dicaearch.2.4.
    III ὃς καί, v. καί B. 6; but καὶ ὅς and who (which), D.23.68.
    2

    Ἀπολλώνιον ὃν καὶ Φᾶβι A.

    , called also Ph., Wilcken Chr.11 A52 (ii B. C.), etc.: for nom. sg. masc. v. καί B. 2.
    IV ὅς κε or κεν, [dialect] Att. ὃς ἄν, whosoever, who if any.., v. ἄν B. 1.2.
    2 ὅς κε is also used so as to contain the antec. in itself, much like εἴ τις as νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδὲν κλαίειν, ὅς κε θάνῃσι I am not wroth that men should weep for whoever be dead, Od.4.196: ὅστις is also used in this way, cf.

    ὅστις 1

    .
    V ὅσπερ, ὅστε, ὅστις, v. sub vocc.     0-2A b. abs. usages of certain Cases of the Relat. Pron.:
    I gen. sg. οὗ, of Place,
    1 like ὅπου, where, A.Pers. 486, S.OC 158 (lyr.), etc.;

    οὗ δή A.Pr. 814

    , v.l. in Pl.Phdr. 248b, etc.;

    οὗπερ A.Th. 1016

    , S. Aj. 1237, OC77, etc.; also of circumstances,

    οὗ γὰρ τοιούτων δεῖ, τοιοῦτός εἰμ' ἐγώ Id.Ph. 1049

    ;

    εἰ γένοιο οὗ νῦν εἰμί Pl.Smp. 194a

    , etc.;

    ἔστιν οὗ

    in some places,

    E.Or. 638

    ;

    οὗ μέν.., οὗ δέ..

    in some places.., in others..,

    Arist.Oec. 1345b34

    : c. gen., οὐκ εἶδεν οὗ γῆς εἰσέδυ in what part of the earth, E.IA[ 1583];

    ἐννοεῖς οὗ ἐστὶ.. τοῦ ἀναμιμνήσκεσθαι Pl.Men. 84a

    ;

    συνιδὼν οὗ κακῶν ἦν Luc.Tox.17

    .
    2 in pregnant phrases, μικρὸν προϊόντες..,οὗ ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο (for ἐκεῖσε οὗ) X.An.2.1.6 ; so

    οὗπερ προσβεβοηθήκει Th.2.86

    , cf. 1.134 ; ἀπιὼν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, οὗ κατέφυγε (for οἷ κατέφυγε καὶ οὗ ἦν) X.Cyr.5.4.14 (dub. l.);

    ἐπειδὰν ἱζήσωμεν οὗ ἄγεις Philostr.Her.Prooem.13

    : in later Gr. οὗ was used simply for οἷ, οὗπερ ἂν ἔλθῃ Tim069, cf. Ev.Luc.10.1, etc.: but in early writers this is f. l., as in D.21.74, etc.
    II dat. fem. ᾗ, [dialect] Dor. ᾇ, of Place, where, or Manner, as, v. .
    III old loc. οἷ, as Adv., v. οἷ.
    2 old abl. (?) ὧ, in [dialect] Dor. (cf. ϝοίκω), τηνῶθε καθεῖλον, ὧ ( whence)

    μ' ἐκέλευ καθελεῖν τυ Theoc.3.11

    ;

    ἐν τᾷ πόλι, ὧ κ' ᾖ, καρῡξαι ἐν τἀγορᾷ IG9(1).334.21

    ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.).
    2 in [dialect] Att. ὅ, for which reason, E.Hec.13, Ph. 155, 263, Ar.Ec. 338: also acc. neut. pl. in this sense, S.Tr. 137 (lyr.), Isoc.8.122.
    3 whereas, Th.2.40,3.12, Ep.Rom.6.10, Ep.Gal.2.20.
    V

    ἀφ' οὗπερ

    from the time that..,

    A.Pers. 177

    .
    VI ἐφ' ᾧ, v. ἐπί B. 111.3.
    ------------------------------------
    ὅς [(B)], ἥ, ὅν (not ὅ, v. Il.1.609,21.305, Od.11.515), gen.
    A

    οἷο Il.3.333

    , Od.1.330, al.,

    οὗ 23.150

    , al. ; Cret. [full] ϝός Leg.Gort.1.18,al., SIG 1183 ; so in [dialect] Aeol., Sapph.Supp.1.6, Lyr.Adesp.32, cf. A.D.Pron. 107.11 :—POSSESS. PRON.:
    I of the 3 pers., his, her, put either before or after its Noun, ᾧ πενθερῷ, ὃν θυμόν, etc., Il.6.170, 202, etc. ;

    ἧς ἀρχῆς IG12.761

    ; πόσιος οὗ, πατέρι ᾧ, Od.23.150,3.39, etc.: sts. also with Art.,

    τὰ ἃ κῆλα Il.12.280

    ;

    τὰ ἃ δώματα Od.14.153

    , etc.; also in Lyr., Pi.O.5.8, P.6.36 (elsewh. Pi. prefers ἑός), B.5.47: sts. in Trag.,

    λέσχας ἇς A.Eu. 367

    (lyr.);

    ὧν παίδων S.OC 1639

    (iamb.);

    ἐκγόνοισιν οἷς E.Med. 955

    (iamb.): with Art.,

    λιτῶν τῶν ὧν A.Th. 641

    ;

    ὅπλων τῶν ὧν S.Aj. 442

    ;

    τῶν ὧν τέκνων Id.Tr. 266

    , cf. 525 (lyr.);

    τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ Id.OT 1248

    : so in Cret. Prose,

    τὰ ϝὰ αὐτᾶς Leg.Gort. 2.46

    ; in Thgn.1009, ὧν αὐτοῦ κτεάνων is to be restd. for τῶν.. from IG12.499 ; once in Hdt.,

    γυναῖκα ἥν 1.205

    ; never in [dialect] Att. Prose.
    II of the 2 pers., for σός, thy, thine, Hes.Op. 381, AP7.539 (Pers.), Mosch.4.77(dub. in Hom., v. infr.); and
    III of the I pers., for ἐμός, my, mine, Od.9.28,13.320, A.R.4.1015, 1036.—Signfs. II and III were denied for Homer by Aristarch., see esp. A.D.Pron.109.20 ; in Od.9.28 and 34 he (or at least A. D. l.c.) rendered ἧς γαίης and πατρίδος 'a man's own fatherland', and athetized Od.13.320: in Il.14.221, 264,16.36,19.174, al., φρεσὶ σῇσιν has better Ms. authority than φρεσὶν ᾗσιν; and in Od.15.542, cf. 1.402, δώμασι σοῖσιν than δώμασιν οἷσιν; v. ἑός. (Cogn. with Skt. σϝάς 'his (my, thy) own', Slav. stem. svo- (used of all 3 persons, as in Skt.): I.-E. swo- was related to I.-E. sewo-, v. ἑός.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὅς

  • 14 οὗτος

    οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen. τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual fem. never in [dialect] Att., v. , , τό, init.:—demonstr. Pron.,
    A this, common from Hom. downwds.
    A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο prob. arose from a reduplication of the demonstr. , , τό with insertion of - υ- (= Skt. Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα fr. τα-υ-τα: [dialect] Dor. gen. sg. fem.

    τούτας Philol.11

    ; nom. pl.

    τοῦτοι, ταῦται A.D.Synt.111.23

    : the former occurs Sophr.24, GDI 3045 B 6 ([place name] Selinus), SIG339.16 (Rhodes, iii B. C.), etc., the latter is dub. in Sophr.97, certain in SIG 241 B117 (Delph., iv B. C.): in [dialect] Boeot. all forms begin with οὑτ-, as gen. sg. neut.

    οὕτω Supp.Epigr.3.359.11

    (iii B. C.); acc. sg. fem.

    οὕταν Corinn. Supp.2.80

    ; acc. pl. neut.

    οὗτα SIG1185.20

    (Tanagra, iii B. C.), etc.: gen. pl. fem. [dialect] Att. τούτων, Cret.

    ταυτᾶν Leg.Gort.5.19

    ; neut.

    ταύτων Michel 1334.10

    (Elis, iv B. C.).—In [dialect] Ion. sts. written ταότην, ταο̄τα, SIG283.19 (Chios, iv B. C.), 46.7 (Halic., v B. C.), al.—In [dialect] Att. οὗτος was freq. strengthd. by the demonstr. -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, gen. τουτουί, dat. τουτῳί, acc. τουτονί; pl. nom. οὑτοιί, neut. ταυτί, etc., this man here: sts. a Particle is inserted between the Pron. and , as αὑτηγί for αὑτηί γε, Ar.Ach. 784; τουτογί for τουτί γε, Id.V. 781, Av. 894, al.; ταυταγί for ταυτί γε, Id.Eq. 492, Pax 1057, al.; τουτοδί for τουτὶ δέ, Id.Pl. 227; τουτουμενί for τουτουὶ μέν, Id.Ra. 965.—In codd. the ν ἐφελκυστικόν is sts. added in the forms οὑτοσίν, οὑτωσίν, and οὑτοσίν is said to be [dialect] Att. by A.D.Pron.59.24, 82.11. [This ι is always long, and a long vowel or diphthong before it becomes short, as αὑτη?οὗτοςXί, τουτω?οὗτοςXί, οὑτοῐί, Ar.Nu. 201, Pl.44, Ach.40, etc.]
    B USAGE in regard to CONCORD. οὗτος is freq. used as a Pron. Subst.: hence neut. is folld. by gen.,

    κατὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἀκροπόλιος Hdt. 1.84

    ;

    εἰς τοῦθ' ὕβρεως ἐλήλυθεν D.4.37

    ;

    εἰς τοῦθ' ἥκεις μανίας Id.36.48

    ;

    ταῦτα τῶν μαθημάτων Pl.Euthd. 278b

    : but quite as freq. as Adj., in which case its Subst. commonly takes the Art., οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος.—But the Art. is absent,
    1 always in [dialect] Ep. Poets (exc. Od.18.114),

    οὗτος ἀνήρ Il.14.471

    , Od.1.406, etc.: sts. also in Trag., A.Pers. 122 (lyr.), 495, S.Ph. 406, OC 471, 1177: once in an Inscr., τοπεῖα:

    τούτων τὰ ἡμίσεα τοπείων IG22.1622.135

    (iv B. C.).
    2 sts. when the Noun is so specified that the Art. is not needed,

    ἐς γῆν ταύτην.., ἥντινα νῦν Σκύθαι νέμονται Hdt.4.8

    ;

    ταύτας ἃς οἱ πατέρες παρέδοσαν μελέτας Th. 1.85

    , cf. Pl.R. 449d, etc.;

    πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος, ὃν θρηνεῖς ἀεί S.El. 530

    .
    3 when οὗτος is used in local sense, here, v. infr. c. 1.5.
    4 when the Noun with which οὗτος agrees stands as its Predicate,

    αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι πρόφασις S.Ph. 1034

    ; δικαστοῦ αὕτη ἀρετή [ἐστι] Pl.Ap. 18a: this exception extends to cases in which the Predicate is not so distinctly separated from the Subject, αἰτίαι μὲν αὗται προυγεγένηντο these were the grievances which already existed, Th.1.66; ταύτην φήμην παρέδοσαν this was the report which.., Pl.Phlb. 16c: freq. with a [comp] Sup., κίνησις αὕτη μεγίστη δὴ.. ἐγένετο this was notably the greatest movement which.., Th.1.1, cf. 3.113: with

    πρῶτος Id.1.55

    ,98, 6.31, Ev.Luc. 2.2.
    5 when [ per.] 3rd pers. is used for [ per.] 2nd to express contempt, οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὑτοσὶ ἀνήρ, Pl.Grg. 467b, 489b, etc.
    II though οὗτος usu. agrees with the Noun that serves as Predicate, it is not rare to find it in the neut.,

    μανία δὲ καὶ τοῦτ' ἐστί E.Ba. 305

    ;

    τοῦτο γάρ εἰσι.. εὔθυναι D.19.82

    , etc.: and in pl.,

    οὐκ ἔστι ταῦτα ἀρχή Aeschin. 3.13

    ;

    ταῦτ' ἐστὶν ὁ προδότης Id.2.166

    : so with an explanatory clause added,

    τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν ὁ συκοφάντης, αἰτιᾶσθαι μὲν πάντα ἐξελέγξαι δὲ μηδέν D.57.34

    .
    2 so also with a Noun in apposition,

    τούτοισιν μὲν ταῦτα μέλει, κίθαρις καὶ ἀοιδή Od.1.159

    ;

    τούτου τιμῶμαι, ἐν πρυτανείῳ σιτήσεως Pl.Ap. 36e

    , cf. E.Fr.323.3, etc.
    3 the neut. also may refer to a masc. or fem. Noun, καρπὸν φορέει κυάμῳ ἴσον: τοῦτο ἐπεὰν γένηται πέπον κτλ. Hdt.4.23, cf. X.An.1.5.10, etc.
    4 the neut. is also used of classes of persons, μελιτοπῶλαι καὶ τυροπῶλαι:

    τοῦτο δ' εἰς ἕν ἐστι συγκεκυφός Ar.Eq. 854

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 711a; or of an abstract fact,

    οὐκ Ἰοφῶν ζῇ;—τοῦτο γάρ τοι καὶ μόνον ἔτ' ἐστὶ λοιπὸν ἀγαθόν Ar.Ra.73

    .
    III with Prons.,
    1 personal, οὗτος σύ, in local sense, v. infr. c.1.5.
    2 interrog., τί τοῦτ' ἔλεξας; what is this that.. ? S.Ph. 1173 (lyr.), cf. Ant.7; ποίοισι τούτοις; for ποῖά ἐστι ταῦτα οἷς [ἔχεις ἐλπίδα]; Id.OC 388, cf.Ant. 1049; Νέστορ' ἔρειο ὅν τινα τοῦτον ἄγει whom he brings here, Il.11.612.
    3 with οἷος, Od.20.377, Pl.Phd. 61c.
    4 possess., πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος this father of thine, S.El. 530, cf. X.An.7.3.30.
    5 demonstr., οὗτος ἐκεῖνος, τὸν σὺ ζητέεις, where ἐκεῖνος is the Predicate, Hdt.1.32;

    τοῦτ' ἔστ' ἐκεῖνο E. Hel. 622

    , cf. Or. 804; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, v. αὐτός 1.7; τοῦτον τὸν αὐτὸν ἄνδρα this same man, S.Ph. 128.
    b exceptionally,

    Διφίλου οὗτος ὅδ' ἐστὶ τύπος IG12(5).300

    ([place name] Paros).
    IV with Numerals, τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη these three years, Lys.7.10codd.; [στρατείαν] ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονὶ ποιεῖται for these eleven months, D.8.2, cf. 3.4;

    τριακοστὴν ταύτην ἡμέραν Men.Epit.27

    ;

    ταύτας τριάκοντα μνᾶς D.27.23

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 463b, etc.
    C SIGNIFICATION AND SPECIAL IDIOMS:
    I this, to designate the nearer, opp. ἐκεῖνος, that, the more remote, ταῦτα, like τὰ ἐνταῦθα, things round and about us, earthly things, Pl.Phd. 75e (v. l.); cf. ὅδε init.: but οὗτος sts. indicates that which is not really nearest, but most important, δεῖ.. τὸ βέλτιστον ἀεί, μὴ τὸ ῥᾷστον λέγειν: ἐπὶ ἐκεῖνο μὲν γὰρ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ βαδιεῖται, ἐπὶ τοῦτο δὲ κτλ. D.8.72, cf. 51.3 and 18.
    2 when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε prop. refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes,

    οὐκ ἔστι σοι ταῦτ', ἀλλά σοι τάδ' ἔστι S.OC 787

    , cf. ὅδε III. 2: freq., however, where there are not two things, οὗτος refers to what follows, Il. 13.377, Od.2.306, etc.; οὔκουν.. τοῦτο γιγνώσκεις, ὅτι .. ; A.Pr. 379, etc.
    3 οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος denotes praise, ὁ πάντ' ἄναλκις οὗτος, i.e. Aegisthus, S.El. 301;

    τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας Pl.Cri. 45a

    ; so D.de Coron. uses οὗτος of Aeschines, ἐκεῖνος of Philip; but οὗτος is used of Philip, D.2.15, 4.3.
    b of what is familiar, τούτους τοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, of the Persians, X.An.1.5.8;

    οἱ τὰς τελετὰς.. οὗτοι καταστήσαντες Pl.Phd. 69c

    , cf. Men. 80a; τὸ θυλακῶδες τοῦτο the familiar bag-like thing, Thphr.HP3.7.3, cf. 3.18.11, 4.7.1;

    οἱ τὰς κόρας ταύτας ὠνούμενοι τοῖς παισίν D.Chr.31.153

    .
    4 in [dialect] Att. law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff (as in Aeschin. 2.130 ) or defendant (as in Id.1.1); so, in the political speeches of D., οὗτοι are the opposite party, 4.1, 8.7, etc.; but in the forensic speeches, οὗτοι freq. means the judges, the court, 21.134, 36.47.
    5 much like an Adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ' οὗτος κατὰ νῆας.. ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest.. ? Il.10.82; freq. in [dialect] Att., τίς οὑτοσί; who's this here? Ar.Ach. 1048; πολλὰ ὁρῶ ταῦτα πρόβατα I see many sheep here, X.An.3.5.9 (as v.l.): with Pron. of 2 pers., οὗτος σύ ho you! you there! S.OT 532, 1121, E.Hec. 1280, etc.: and then οὗτος alone like a voc., οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς; A.Supp. 911,cf.S.Aj.71, E.Alc. 773, Ar.Eq. 240, Nu. 220, al.: with a pr. n.,

    ὦ οὗτος, Αἴας S.Aj.89

    ;

    ὦ οὗτος οὗτος, Οἰδίπους Id.OC 1627

    , cf. Ar.V. 1364: with voc.,

    βέντισθ' οὗτος Theoc.5.76

    :—the fem. is rarer,

    αὕτη E.Med. 922

    ;

    αὕτη σύ Ar.Th. 610

    .—This phrase mostly implies anger, impatience, or scorn.
    II simply as antec. to ὅς, Od.2.40, S.OT 1180, etc.: freq. following relat. clause,

    ἅ γ' ἔλαβες,.. μεθεῖναι ταῦτα Id.Ph. 1247

    , cf. 1319,Ant. 183, 203, Pl.Grg. 469c.
    III = τοιοῦτος, οὗτος ἐγὼ ταχυτᾶτι Pi.O. 4.26;

    σὺ τοίνυν οὗτος εὑρέθης D.18.282

    , cf. 173.
    IV after a parenthesis, the Subject, though already named, is freq. emphat. repeated by

    οὗτος, οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Ἀριστέης.., οὐδὲ οὗτος προσωτέρω.. ἔφησε ἀπικέσθαι Hdt.4.16

    , cf.81 (s. v. l.), 1.146, Pl.Phd. 107d, etc.
    V καὶ οὗτος is added to heighten the force of a previous word,

    ξυνεστῶτες.. ναυτικῷ ἀγῶνι, καὶ τούτῳ πρὸς Ἀθηναίους Th.4.55

    , cf. Hdt.1.147, 6.11, etc.; so

    οὐδὲ τούτου Aeschin.2.100

    ; v. infr. VIII.2.
    VI repeated, where for the second we should merely say he or it,

    τοῖσιν τούτου τοῦτον μέλεσιν.. κελαδοῦντες Ar.Ra. 1526

    , cf. Pl.La. 200d.
    VII ταῦτα is used in some special phrases,
    1 ταῦτ', ὦ δέσποτα yes Sir (i. e. ἔστι ταῦτα, ταῦτα δράσω, etc.), Ar.V. 142, Pax 275, cf. Eq.III; so

    ταῦτα δή Id.Ach. 815

    ;

    ταῦτά νυν Id.V. 1008

    ; so also ἦν ταῦτα even so, true, E.Ph. 417.
    3 καὶ ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα so much for that, freq. in [dialect] Att., as Pl.Smp. 220c.
    4 ταῦτα at end of a formula in epitaphs, etc., prob. short for ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει or ὁ βίος ταῦτά ἐστιν, e.g. οὐδὶς ( = -εὶς) ἀθάνατος:

    ταῦτα IG14.420

    ; Προκόπι ταῦτα ib.1824; χαίρεται ( = -τε) ταῦτα ib.1479, etc.: similarly perh. in a letter,

    ἂμ μὴ πέμψῃς, οὐ μὴ φάγω, οὐ μὴ πείνω. ταῦτα POxy.119.15

    (ii/iii A. D.).
    VIII Adverbial usages:
    1 ταῦταabs., therefore, that is why.., Il.11.694;

    ταῦτ' ἄρα Ar.Ach.90

    ,Nu. 319, 335, 394, al., X.Smp.4.55;

    ταῦτα δή A.Pers. 159

    , Pl.Smp. 174a;

    ταῦτ' οὖν S.Tr. 550

    , Ar.V. 1358, etc.; αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω, ἵνα .. Pl.Prt. 310e: τοῦτο is rare in this sense,

    τοῦτ' ἀφικόμην, ὅπως.. εὖ πράξαιμί τι S. OT 1005

    ; αὐτὸ γὰρ τοῦτο just because of this, Pl.Smp. 204a.
    b πρὸς ταῦτα so then, therefore, prop. used in indignant defiance, A.Pr. 992, 1043, S.Aj. 971, 1115, 1313, OT 426, OC 455, etc.
    2 καὶ ταῦτα, adding a circumstance heightening the force of what has been said, and that,

    ἄνδρα γενναῖον θανεῖν, καὶ ταῦτα πρὸς γυναικός A.Eu. 627

    : but mostly with a part.,

    ὅς γ' ἐξέλυσας ἄστυ.., καὶ ταῦθ' ὑφ' ἡμῶν οὐδὲν ἐξειδὼς πλέον S.OT37

    , cf. Ar.Ra. 704, Pl.Phdr. 241e, etc.; or with a part. omitted, ἥτις.. τὴν τεκοῦσαν ὕβρισεν, καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος (sc. οὖσα) S.El. 614; so

    καὶ ταῦτα μέντοι Pl.Erx. 400b

    .
    b καὶ ταῦτα anyhow, no matter what happens (or happened), ἐπεχείρησας, οὐδὲν ὢν καὶ ταῦτα you tried, but were no good anyhow, i.e. try as you might, Id.R. 341c, cf. Diod.Com.3.5.
    3 τοῦτο μέν.., τοῦτο δέ .. on the one hand.., on the other.., partly.., partly.., very freq. in Hdt., as 1.161, al.; τοῦτο μέν is sts. answered by δέ only, 4.76, S.Aj. 670, OC 440; by δὲ αὖ, Hdt.7.176; by ἔπειτα δέ, S.Ant.61; by ἀλλά, D.22.13; by εἶτα, S.Ph. 1345; by τοῦτ' αὖθις, Id.Ant. 165.
    4 dat. fem. ταύτῃ,
    a on this spot, here, ταύτῃ μὲν.., τῇδε δ' αὖ .. Id.Ph. 1331;

    ἀλλ' ἐὰν ταύτῃ γε νικᾷ, ταυτῃὶ πεπλήξεται Ar.Eq. 271

    , cf. Th. 1221.
    b in this point, herein,

    μηδὲν ταύτῃ γε κομήσῃς Id.Pl. 572

    , cf. X.Hier.7.12, etc.
    c in this way, thus, A.Pr. 191, S.OC 1300, etc.;

    οὐ.. ταῦτ' ἐστί πω ταύτῃ Ar.Eq. 843

    ;

    ἀλλ' οὔτι ταύτῃ ταῦτα E. Med. 365

    , cf. A.Pr. 511: antec. to ὥσπερ, Pl.R. 330c; to ὅπῃ, X.Cyr. 8.3.2;

    οὕτω τε καὶ ταύτῃ γίγνοιτο Pl.Lg. 681d

    ; καὶ οὕτω καὶ ταύτῃ ἂν ἔχοι ib. 714d; ταύτῃ καλεῖσθαι, etc., like οὕτω κ., Sch.Pl.Smp. 215b.
    5 ἐκ τούτου or τούτων thereupon, X.HG3.1.6, Oec.2.1; therefore, Id.An.3.3.5.
    b in the meantime, Hdt.1.126, Th.3.72, X.Mem.2.1.27.
    7 πρὸς τούτοις ([etym.] - οισι) besides, Hdt.2.51, Pl.Prt. 326a, X.Mem.2.4.4, Ar.Pl. 540.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὗτος

  • 15 ὅπως

    ὅπως, [dialect] Ep. also and [dialect] Aeol. [full] ὅππως, [dialect] Ion. [full] ὅκως, [dialect] Dor. [full] ὁπῶς acc. to A.D.Adv.173.11: correlat. to ὡς and πῶς.
    A ADV. OF MANNER, Relat. as, in such manner as, and with interrog. force how, in what manner, rarely indef., v. infr. A. V.
    B FINAL CONJUNCTION, in such a manner that, in order that.
    A ADV. OF MANNER, how, as:
    I Relat. to ὥς or οὕτως (like ὡς), in such manner as, as:
    1 with the ordinary Constr. of the Relat.:
    a with ind.,

    ἦ τοι νόστον, ὅπως φρεσὶ σῇσι μενοινᾷς, ὥς τοι Ζεὺς τελέσειεν Od.15.111

    ;

    οὕτως ὅ... S.Tr. 330

    ;

    ὧδ' ὅ. Id.El. 1301

    ;

    οὕτως ὅ. δύνανται Th.7.67

    : sts. an analogous word replaces the antec. Adv., με τοῖον ἔθηκεν, ὅπως (for οἷον)

    ἐθέλει Od.16.208

    : freq. without any antec. expressed, ἔλθοι ὅ... ἐθέλω (sc. αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν) 14.172 ;

    ἔρξον ὅ. ἐθέλεις Il.4.37

    , Od.13.145 ;

    χρῶ ὅ. βούλει X.Cyr.8.3.46

    ; ποίει ὅ. ἄριστόν σοι δοκεῖ εἶναι ib.4.5.50 ; ὅ. ἔχω as I am, on the spot, S. Ph. 819.
    b with [tense] fut. ind., esp. after Verbs of seeing, providing, taking care.., in the manner in which, how, that,

    οἱ Περσικοὶ νόμοι ἐπιμέλονται ὅπως μὴ τοιοῦτοι ἔσονται οἱ πολῖται X.Cyr.1.2.3

    ;

    ποιέειν ὅκως μηκέτι κεῖνος ἐς Ἕλληνας ἀπίξεται Hdt.5.23

    ;

    ἐφρόντιζον ὅκως μὴ λείψομαι τῶν πρότερον γενομένων Id.7.8

    .ά, cf. Pl.Ap. 29e ;

    ἔπρασσον ὅπως τις βοήθεια ἥξει Th.3.4

    ;

    τοῦτο μηχανᾶσθαι ὅπως ἀποφεύξεται πᾶν ποιῶν θάνατον Pl.Ap. 39a

    ;

    τούτου στοχαζόμενοι, ὅπως.. ἔσονται Id.Grg. 502e

    (cf. infr.111.1 b, etc.): this [tense] fut. ind. may become opt. after a historical tense,

    ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅπως μήτε ἄσιτοι μήτε ἄποτοί ποτε ἔσοιντο X.Cyr.8.1.43

    , cf. HG7.5.3, Cyr.8.1.10, Oec.7.5, Ages.2.8 ; and ὅπως is freq. used interchangeably with such forms as δι' ὧν, ὅτῳ τρόπῳ, etc.,

    εἰσηγοῦνται μὴ δι' ὧν.. ἀσκήσουσιν, ἀλλ' ὅπως.. δόξουσι Isoc.1.4

    , cf. Th.6.11: this sense easily passes into a final sense, so that,

    τοῦτο ἀπόβαλε οὕτω ὅκως μηκέτι ἥξει Hdt.3.40

    ; οὕτω δ' (sc. ποίει)

    ὅπως μήτηρ σε μὴ 'πιγνώσεται S.El. 1296

    , cf. Ar.Ra. 905, X.Cyr.4.5.25, HG 2.4.17 ; v. infr. B.
    2 with ἄν ([dialect] Ep. κε ) and subj. in indefinite sentences, in whatever way, just as, however,

    ὅππως κεν ἐθέλῃσιν Il.20.243

    (but ὅπως ἐθέλῃσιν (without κε) Od.1.349, 6.189) ;

    οὕτως ὅκως ἂν καὶ δυνώμεθα Hdt.8.143

    ;

    οὕτως ὅπως ἂν αὐτοὶ βούλωνται X.Cyr.1.1.2

    , cf. IG22.1.13 (v B. C.), Pl.Phd. 116a, Smp. 174b, etc.
    b with opt. after historical tenses,

    οὕτως ὅ. τύχοιεν Th.8.95

    ;

    ὅ. βούλοιντο X.HG 2.3.13

    ; in a gnomic statement,

    εἰκῇ κράτιστον ζῆν ὅ. δύναιτό τις S. OT 979

    : when ἄν appears with the opt., it belongs to the Verb and not to ὅπως, ὅ. ἄν τις ὀνομάσαι τοῦτο however one might think fit to call it, D.13.4.
    3 a very common phrase is οὐκ ἔστιν ὅ. ( οὐκ ἔσθ' ὅπως ) there is no way in which.., it cannot be that,

    οὐκ ἔστι ὅκως κοτὲ σοὺς δέξονται λόγους Hdt.7.102

    , cf. Ar.Pl.18, D.18.208, al.; so οὐκ ἔστιν ὅ. οὐ, fieri non potest quin,

    οὐκ ἔσθ' ὅ. οὐ πιστὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν πτερὸν ἐξήγαγ' S.OC97

    , cf. Ar.Ach. 116, Eq. 426, Th. 882, Pl.Ap. 27e ; οὐδαμῶς ὅ. οὐ, in answer, it must positively be so, Id.Tht. 160d ; so also

    οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο τοῦθ' ὅ... οὐ φανῶ S.OT 1058

    ; οὐ γὰρ γένοιτ' ἄν, ταῦθ' ὅ. οὐχ ὧδ' ἔχειν (anacoluth. for ἔχει or ἕξει) Id.Aj. 378 : so in questions, ἔσθ' ὅ... ἔλθωμεν; Ar.V. 471 (v.l. -οιμεν) ; ἔστιν οὖν ὅ. ὁ τοιοῦτος φιλοσοφήσει; Pl.R. 495a, cf. Phdr. 262b, Tht. 154c : so, besides ind. of all tenses, οὐκ ἔσθ' ὅ. may be folld. by opt. with

    ἄν, οὐ γάρ ἐσθ' ὅπως μί' ἡμέρα γένοιτ' ἂν ἡμέραι δύο Ar.Nu. 1181

    , cf. V. 212, Isoc.12.156, Pl.La. 184c: by ind. with

    ἄν, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως ἂν.. κατέστησαν Isoc. 15.206

    , cf. D.33.28 : ἄν is omitted in

    οὐκ ἔσθ' ὅπως λέξαιμι A.Ag. 620

    , cf. E.Alc.52, Ar.V. 471 (v.l. ἔλθωμεν).
    4 in Trag., etc., like ὡς in comparisons,

    κῦμ' ὅπως A.Pr. 1001

    ;

    γῄτης ὅπως S.Tr.32

    , cf. 442, 683 ;

    ὅπως δρῦν ὑλοτόμοι σχίζουσι κάρα Id.El.98

    (anap.) ; ὅπως ἁ πάνδυρτος ἀηδών ib. 1076 (lyr.), cf. Ph. 777, E.Andr. 1140 ;

    ὅκως τις καλλίης κάτω κύπτων Herod.3.41

    ; so in [dialect] Locr. Prose,

    ὅπω (ς) ξένον IG9(1).334.2

    (V B.C.).
    5 like ὡς or ὅτι, with [comp] Sup. of Advs.,

    ὅ. ἄριστα A.Ag. 600

    , IG12.44.8, etc.; ὅ. ἀνωτάτω as high up as possible, Ar. Pax 207 ; in full, οὕτως ὅ. ἥδιστα (sc. ἔχει) S.Tr. 330.
    6 with a gen. added, σοῦσθε ὅ. ποδῶν run as you are off for feet, i. e. as quick as you can, A.Supp. 837 (lyr., where however < ἔχετε> shd. prob. be added); v. infr. 111.10, ἔχω (A) B. 11.2b.
    7 sts. of Time, when,

    Τρῶες.. ὅπως ἴδον αἷμ' Ὀδυσῆος.., ἐπ' αὐτῷ πάντες ἔβησαν Il.11.459

    , cf. 12.208, Od.3.373: freq. in Hdt. with opt., whenever,

    ὅκως μὲν εἴη ἐν τῇ γῇ καρπὸς ἁδρός 1.17

    , cf. 68, 100, 162, 186, 2.13, 174, al.: in Trag. and Com., A.Pers. 198, S.El. 749, Tr. 765, Ar.Nu. 60 : with [comp] Sup. of Advs.,

    ὅ. πρῶτα

    as soon as,

    Hes.Th. 156

    ;

    ὅ. ὤκιστα Thgn.427

    ;

    ὅ. τάχιστα A.Pr. 230

    .
    8 of Place, where, dub. in Herod.3.75.
    II ὅπως is sts. used to introduce the substance of a statement, after Verbs of saying, thinking, or perceiving, that, how,

    λόγῳ ἀνάπεισον ὅκως.. Hdt.1.37

    ;

    οὐδὲ φήσω ὅκως.. Id.2.49

    , cf. 3.115, 116 ;

    τοῦτ' αὐτὸ μή μοι φράζ', ὅπως οὐκ εἶ κακός S.OT 548

    , cf. Ant. 223, Pl.Euthd. 296e ; after ἐλπίζειν, S.El. 963, E.Heracl. 1051 ; after Verbs of emotion, ἐμοὶ δ' ἄχος.., ὅπως δὴ δηρὸν ἀποίχεται grief is mine, when I think how.. (i. e. that..), Od.4.109, cf. S.Ph. 169 (lyr.); after θαυμάζω freq. in [dialect] Att.,

    θαυμάζω ὅ. ποτὲ ἐπείσθησαν Ἀθηναῖοι X.Mem.1.1.20

    , cf. Pl.Cri. 43a.
    2 οὐχ ὅ... ἀλλὰ or ἀλλὰ καὶ.. is not only not.. but.., and is expld. by an ellipsis of λέγω or ἐρῶ (cf. ὅτι IV), οὐχ ὅ. κωλυταὶ.. γενήσεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ.. δύναμιν προσλαβεῖν περιόψεσθε not only will you not become.., but you will also.., Th.1.35, cf. X.HG5.4.34, D.6.9 ;

    οὐχ ὅ. ὑμῖν τῶν αὑτοῦ τι ἐπέδωκεν, ἀλλὰ τῶν ὑμετέρων πολλὰ ὑφῄρηται Lys.30.26

    ;

    οὐχ ὅ. τούτων χάριν ἀπέδοσαν, ἀλλ' ἀπολιπόντες ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων συμμαχίαν εἰσῆλθον Isoc.14.27

    , cf. D.18.131, 53.13 ;

    οὐ γὰρ ὅπως.., ἀλλὰ καὶ.. Id.21.11

    ;

    οὔκουν ὅπως.., ἀλλὰ.. X.Cyr.8.2.12

    ; also

    οὐχ ὅ..., ἀλλ' οὐδέ.., οὐχ ὅ. ἀδικοῦντες, ἀλλ' οὐδ' ἐπιδημοῦντες ἐφυγαδευόμεθα Id.HG2.4.14

    ;

    οὐχ ὅ. τῆς κοινῆς ἐλευθερίας μετέχομεν, ἀλλ' οὐδὲ δουλείας μετρίας τυχεῖν ἠξιώθημεν Isoc.14.5

    ;

    διμοιρίαν λαμβάνων ἐν ταῖς θοίναις οὐχ ὅπως ἀμφοτέραις ἐχρῆτο, ἀλλὰ διαπέμπων οὐδετέραν αὑτῷ κατέλειπε X.Ages.5.1

    ;

    οὐχ ὅ. ζημιοῦν, ἀλλὰ μηδ' ἀτιμάζειν.. Th.3.42

    : so sts. μὴ ὅ. (where an imper. must be supplied), μὴ ὅ. ὀρχεῖσθαι ἀλλ' οὐδὲ ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε do not think that you could dance = so far from being able to dance, X.Cyr.1.3.10.
    b οὐχ ὅ. rarely follows another clause, to say nothing of.., let alone..,

    πεπαύμεθ' ἡμεῖς, οὐχ ὅ. σε παύσομεν S.El. 796

    ; μηδ' ἐμπίδα, οὐχ ὅπως ταῦρον ἔτι ἄρασθαι δυνάμενος.. let alone a bull, Luc.Cont.8, cf. Prom.8, Pr.Im.7, Pisc. 31.
    III in in direct questions, how, in what way or manner:
    1 with ind.,
    a

    ἔσπετε νῦν μοι ὅππως δὴ.. πῦρ ἔμπεσε νηυσίν Il.16.113

    ;

    εἴπ' ἄγε μ'.. ὅππως τούσδ' ἵππους λάβετον 10.545

    ;

    εὖ μοι κατάλεξον ὅπως ἤντησας Od.3.97

    ;

    ὅπως ἠφανίσθη οὐδὲ λόγῳ εἰκότι δύνανται ἀποφαίνειν Antipho 5.26

    ;

    Ἀλκιβιάδης ἀνήχθη.. ἐπὶ κατασκοπὴν.. τοῦ οἴκαδε κατάπλου ὅπως ἡ πόλις πρὸς αὐτὸν ἔχοι X.HG1.4.11

    ;

    οὐδέ τί πω σάφα ἴδμεν ὅπως ἔσται τάδε ἔργα Il.2.252

    , etc.
    2 with deliberative subj. after Verbs of deliberation, taking care, and the like ,

    λεύσσει ὅπως ὄχ' ἄριστα.. γένηται Il.3.110

    ; ἐνόησεν (gnomic [tense] aor.)

    ὅππως κέρδος ἔῃ 10.225

    ;

    ἀλλ' ἄγεθ' ἡμεῖς οἵδε περιφραζώμεθα πάντες νόστον ὅπως ἔλθῃσι Od.1.77

    , cf. 13.365 ;

    οὐκ οἶδ' ὅπως.. φῶ S.OT 1367

    , cf. Aj. 428, Lys.8.5, Pl.Men. 91d ;

    ἐπιμελητέον ὅπως τρέφωνται οἱ ἵπποι X.Eq.Mag.1.3

    , cf. Oec.7.36,37,9.14, 15.1, Pl.Grg. 515c.—Sts. the [tense] fut. and subj. are conjoined without difference of meaning,

    ἐπράττετο γὰρ.., πρῶτον μὲν ὅπως μὴ περιμείνητε.., δεύτερον δὲ ὅπως ψηφιε̄σθε.., τρίτον δὲ ὅπως μὴ ἔσται Aeschin.3.65

    , cf. X. Ages.7.7, Mem.2.2.10.—On ὅπως ἄν (κεν), v. infr. 5.
    3 with opt. after tenses of past time, τῶν ἀδῄλων ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο ib.1.3.2, etc.: after Verbs of deliberation, being virtually orat. obliq., μερμήριξε.. Ἥρη ὅπως ἐξαπάφοιτο (orat. rect. πῶς ἐξαπάφωμαι;) Il.14.160 ;

    μερμήριζεν ὅπως ἀπολοίατο πᾶσαι νῆες Od.9.554

    , cf. 420 ;

    οὐ γὰρ εἴχομεν.. ὅπως δρῶντες καλῶς πράξαιμεν S.Ant. 271

    ;

    ἐπεμελήθημεν ὅπως ἐξαλειφθείη αὐτῷ τὰ ἁμαρτήματα Lys.6.39

    , cf. 13.32, X.Cyr.6.2.11.
    4 with opt. and ἄν freq. expressing a wish, which in orat. rect. would be expressed by

    πῶς ἄν, σκόπει ὅ. ἂν ἀποθάνοιμεν ἀνδρικώτατα Ar.Eq.81

    (v.l. ἀποθάνωμεν), cf. Nu. 760 ;

    βουλευόμενοι ὅ. ἂν τὴν ἡγεμονίαν λάβοιεν τῆς Ἑλλάδος X.HG7.1.33

    , cf. Cyr.2.1.4 ; τῶν ἄλλων ἐπιμελεῖται ὅ. ἂν θηρῷεν (v.l. -ῶσιν) ib.1.2.10: the opt. with ἄν and subj. sts. appear in consecutive clauses, Id.HG3.2.1.
    5 ὅπως ἄν (κεν) with the subj. is used after imper. or inf. used as imper.,

    πείρα ὅπως κεν δὴ σὴν πατρίδα γαῖαν ἵκηαι Od.4.545

    ;

    φράζεσθαι.., ὅππως κε μνηστῆρας.. κτείνῃς 1.295

    ;

    σκοπεῖτε.., ὅ. ἂν ὑμῖν πρᾶγος εὖ νικᾷ τόδε A.Supp. 233

    , etc.;

    φύλασσε.. ἔπειθ' ὅ. ἂν.. ἡ χάρις.. ἐξ ἁπλῆς διπλῆ φανῇ S.Tr. 618

    , cf. E.IA 539 : in Prose,

    ἐπιμεληθῆναι ὅ. ἂν.. X.Cyr.8.3.6

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 326a;

    μηχανᾶσθαι Id.Phdr. 239b

    , Grg. 481a, cf. Ar.Eq. 917.
    6 rarely c. inf.,

    ἐπιμελήθητε προθύμως ὅπως διπλάσια.. σῖτα καὶ ποτὰ παρασκευασθῆναι X.Cyr.4.2.37

    (v.l. -εσκευασμένα ᾖ), cf. Oec.7.29, HG6.2.32; so later ὅπως παρακολουθῆμεν ([dialect] Dor. inf.) Supp.Epigr.1.170.18 (cf. p.138, Delph., ii B. C.); ὅπως.. ἔχειν, ὅπως.. εἴργεσθαι, D.S.20.4,85;

    ὅπως πέμπιν PTeb.315.30

    (ii A. D.).
    7 after Verbs of fear and caution, ὅπως and ὅπως μή are used with [tense] fut. ind. or [tense] aor. subj. :— the readings are freq. uncertain: the following (among others) are made certain either by the metre or the form,
    a with [tense] fut. ind.,

    δέδοιχ' ὅπως μὴ τεύξομαι Ar.Eq. 112

    ;

    παντὶ λόγῳ ἀντιτείνετε εὐλαβούμενοι ὅπως μὴ.. οἰχήσομαι Pl.Phd. 91c

    ;

    φόβος.. ἔστιν.. ὅπως μὴ αὖθις διασχισθησόμεθα Id.Smp. 193a

    : sts. the preceding Verb is omitted,

    ὅπως μὴ οὐκ.. ἔσομαι Id.Men. 77a

    .
    b with [tense] aor. subj.,

    τὴν θεὸν δ' ὅ. λάθω δέδοικα E.IT 995

    ;

    φυλάττου, ὅ. μὴ εἰς τοὐναντίον ἔλθῃς X.Mem.3.6.16

    : rarely with [tense] pres.,

    οὐ φοβεῖ ὅ. μὴ ἀνόσιον πρᾶγμα τυγχάνῃς πράττων Pl.Euthphr.4e

    : sts. the preceding Verb is omitted, with [tense] aor. subj.,

    ὅκως μή τι ὑμῖν πανώλεθρον κακὸν ἐς τὴν χώρην ἐσβάλωσι Hdt.6.85

    : with [tense] pres. subj.,

    ὅπως μὴ.. ᾖ τοῦτο Pl.Cra. 430d

    .
    c with opt. representing subj. after a historical tense, X. Mem.2.9.3.
    8 this Constr. is used in admonitions or commands: in the orig. Constr. a Verb implying caution or circumspection precedes,

    ὅρα ὅκως μή σευ ἀποστήσονται Πέρσαι Hdt.3.36

    ;

    ἄθρει.. ὅπως μὴ ἐκδύσεται Ar.V. 141

    ; τηρώμεσθ' ὅπως μὴ.. αἰσθήσεται ib. 372 : but this came to be omitted, and ὅπως or ὅπως μή with [tense] fut. ind. or [tense] aor. subj. are exactly = the imper.,

    ἔμβα χὤπως ἀρεῖς Id.Ra. 378

    (lyr.): most freq. with [tense] fut. ind., ὅκως λόγον δώσεις τῶν μετεχείρισας χρημάτων, = δίδου λόγον, Hdt.3.142 ; ὅπως παρέσει μοι, = πάρισθι, Ar.Av. 131 ;

    ὅπως πετήσει Id. Pax77

    , cf. X.An.1.7.3, Lys.1.21, 12.50, Pl.Grg. 489a, etc.: rarely with I pers.,

    ὁποῖα κισσὸς δρυός, ὅπως τῆσδ' ἕξομαι E.Hec. 398

    , cf. Ar.Ec. 297 (lyr.): very rarely with [tense] aor. subj.,

    ὅπως μή τι ἡμᾶς σφήλῃ Pl.Euthd. 296a

    codd.;

    ὅπως μὴ.. ἐξαπατήσῃ Id.Prt. 313c

    ;

    ὅπως μὴ ποιήσητε D.4.20

    codd.—The codd. freq. vary, as between διδάξεις and

    - ξῃς Ar.Nu. 824

    ; τιμωρήσονται and

    - ωνται Th.1.56

    ; πράξομεν and - ωμεν ib.82 ; θορυβήσει and

    - σῃ D.13.14

    , etc.—Since the [tense] fut. is frequently, and the [tense] aor. (whether 1 or 2) rarely guaranteed by metre or form, the [tense] aor. 1 forms shd. prob. be rejected, both in signf. 7 and 8, in cases where codd. vary.
    9 as the echo to a preceding πῶς; in dialogue, A καὶ πῶς; B ὅπως; [do you ask] how? Ar. Eq. 128; A πῶς με χρὴ καλεῖν; B ὅπως; Id.Nu. 677, cf. Pl. 139.
    10 with a gen. (v. supr. 1.6),

    οὐκ οἶδα παιδείας ὅπως ἔχει καὶ δικαιοσύνης

    in the matter of..,

    Pl.Grg. 470e

    , cf. R. 389c.
    IV in direct questions, how? ἔπραξας ὅπως; Jul.Ep.82p.106B.-C.; cf. ὅστις.
    V indef., anyhow, τὸ οὐδ' ὅ. the expression 'not at all', Pl.Tht. 183b (v.l. οὐδ' οὕτως).
    B FINAL CONJUNCTION, that, in order that, the original notion of modality being merged in that of purpose or design, cf. ἵνα, with which it is sts. interchanged, Antipho 1.23 and 24, And.3.14, Lycurg. 119 sq.:—in early [dialect] Att. Inscrr. only ὅπως ἄν is used, IG12.39.19, al. ; ὅπως without ἄν only once in cent. iv B. C., ib.22.226.42 (343 B.C.), after which it becomes gradually prevalent:
    1 with subj.,
    a after primary tenses, or after subj. or imper.,

    τὸν δὲ μνηστῆρες.. λοχῶσιν, ὅπως ἀπὸ φῦλον ὄληται Od.14.181

    , cf. A.Ch. 873, S.Ph. 238, El. 457, X.Mem.2.10.2, etc.
    b after historical tenses (v.

    ἵνα B. 1.1b

    ), when there is no [tense] pf. form, or when the [tense] aor. represents the [tense] pf., ξυνελέγημεν ἐνθάδε, ὅ. προμελετήσωμεν we were convened, i. e. we have met in assembly, Ar.Ec. 117 ;

    παρήλθομεν.., ὅπως μὴ χεῖρον βουλεύσησθε Th.1.73

    ; also when the occurrence purposed is regarded from the point of view of the person purposing, ἦλθον πρεσβευσόμενοι, ὅπως μὴ σφίσι.. τὸ αὐτῶν [ναυτικὸν] ἐμπόδιον γένηται ib.31, cf. 57,65, etc.: sts. the opt. and subj. appear in consecutive clauses,

    φρυκτοὺς παρεσκευασμένους ἐς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, ὅπως ἀσαφῆ τὰ σημεῖα.. ᾖ καὶ μὴ βοηθοῖεν Id.3.22

    , cf. 6.96, 7.17.
    2 with opt. after historical tenses,

    πὰρ δέ οἱ αὐτὸς ἔστη, ὅπως.. κῆρας ἀλάλκοι Il.21.548

    ; more freq. in Od., as 13.319, 14.312, 18.160, 22.472; so in S.OT 1005, OC 1305, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Pl.Ti. 77e, etc.: after historical [tense] pres.,

    πέμπει τούσδ' ὅπως κτείνοιεν A.Pers. 450

    ;

    ἡγεμόνα πέμπει ὅπως ἄγοι X.An.4.7.19

    : after opt.,

    ἔλθοι.. ὅ. γένοιτο A.Eu. 297

    , cf. S.Aj. 1221 (lyr.).
    3 with ind.,
    a of historical tenses, where the principal clause expresses an action or obligation unfulfilled,

    εἴθ' εἶχε φωνὴν ἔμφρον' ἀγγέλου δίκην, ὅ. δίφροντις οὖσα μὴ 'κινυσσόμην A.Ch. 196

    , cf. S.El. 1134: rare in Prose,

    ἐδεξάμην ἃν.. φράσαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς.., ὅ... προῄδετε And.2.21

    ; τίς οὐκ ἂν.. ταῦτα ἐδήλωσεν, ὅ... ταῦτα ἠλέγχθη; D.36.20;

    οὐκοῦν ἐχρῆν σε Πηγάσου ζεῦξαι πτερόν, ὅ. ἐφαίνου τοῖς θεοῖς τραγικώτερος Ar. Pax 135

    ; τί.. οὐκ ἔρριψ' ἐμαυτὴν.. ὅ. ἀπηλλάγην; A.Pr. 749.
    b of [tense] fut., θέλγει, ὅ. Ἰθάκης ἐπιλήσεται (= φραζομένη ὅπως ἐ.) Od.1.57, cf. Il.1.136 ;

    [χρὴ] ἀναβιβάζειν ἐπὶ τὸν τροχὸν τοὺς ἀπογραφέντας, ὅ. μὴ πρότερον νὺξ ἔσται And.1.43

    ;

    ἐμισθώσατο τοῦτον.., ὅ. συνερεῖ D.19.316

    : sts. [tense] fut. ind. and [tense] aor. subj. are conjoined,

    σιγᾶθ', ὅ. μὴ πεύσεταί τις, ὦ τέκνα, γλώσσης χάριν δὲ πάντ' ἀπαγγείλῃ τάδε A. Ch. 265

    .
    II ὅπως c. subj. is sts. used after Verbs of will and endeavour, instead of the inf.,

    λίσσεσθαι.. ὅ. νημερτέα εἴπῃ Od.3.19

    ;

    αἰτεῖσθαι ὅ. μὴ καταψηφίσησθε Antipho 1.12

    ; δεήσεται.., ὅ. δίκην μὴ δῷ ib.23 ;

    ὅ. μὴ ἀποθάνῃ ἠντεβόλει Lys.1.29

    ; παρακελεύεσθε ὑμῖν

    αὐτοῖς ὅ... ἐξίητε Lycurg.127

    ( ἔξιτε Rehdantz): with

    ἄν, δεῖταί μου σφόδρα ὅπως ἂν οἰκουρῇ Ar.Ach. 1060

    , cf. Hdt.2.126, 3.44 ;

    διεκελεύετο ὅπως ἂν.. ἐγγράφωσί με Is.7.27

    ; so δεῖ σ' ὅ. δείξεις (for δεῖξαι), S.Aj. 556, may be expld. as ellipsis for δεῖ σ' ὁρᾶν (σκοπεῖν) ὅπως, cf. Id.Ph.55 ;

    δεῖ σ' ὅπως.. μηδὲν διοίσεις.. Cratin.108

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὅπως

  • 16 τις

    τις, [full] τι, Indef. Pron.
    A any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions v. infr.):—but τίς; τί; Interrog. Pron. who? what?, oxyt. in the monosyll. cases, parox. in the others:—Dialectal forms: Cypr. σις ( si se) Inscr.Cypr.135.10 H.; Arc. σις (with <*> for ς) IG5(2).262.25 (Mantinea, v B.C.); Thess. κις ib.9(2).515.12 ([place name] Larissa), 1226.4, 1229.27 ([place name] Phalanna), pl. κινες ib.517.41 ([place name] Larissa), neut. κι in διεκί, ποκκί (qq.v.); neut. pl. [dialect] Dor. σά, [dialect] Boeot. τά, [dialect] Aeol. dat. τίω, τίοισι (v. infr. B). (I.-E. q[uglide]i-, cf. Lat. quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, v. ἄσσα, σά μάν; with τέο (v. infr. B) cf. OSlav. gen. c<*>eso.)
    A Indef. Pron. τις, τι, gen. [dialect] Ion. τεο Od.16.305, Hdt.1.58; more freq. τευ Il.2.388, al., Hdt.4.30, al., Meliss.7, etc.; Trag. and [dialect] Att. του A.Pr.21, Ar.Ach. 329, Th.1.70, etc. (sts. fem., S.Aj. 290, OT 1107 (lyr.), E.Hec. 370, etc.); του is rare after 300 B.C., never in LXX or NT, but found in IG12(5).798.17 (Tenos, iii B.C.), PCair.Zen.250.6, 647.23 (iii B.C.), Plb.3.23.3, revived by the Atticists, D.H.8.29, Plu.Fab.20, etc.; τινος Pi.P.2.90, IG12.16.17, 65.41, A.Eu. 5, Ch. 102, S.Ant. 698, al., Hdt.2.109, al. (Rh.Mus.72.483), etc.; dat. [dialect] Ion.

    τεῳ Il.16.227

    , Od.11.502, Hdt.2.48, 5.86; Trag. and [dialect] Att. τῳ (also in Hom., Il.1.299, 12.328, Od.13.308, 20.297, al., always in masc.) A.Th. 1045, IG12.39.54, D.S.18.45; as fem., A.Th. 472, S. OT80, etc.; τινι (Hom. in the form

    οὔ τινι Il.17.68

    , Od.14.96) Pi. O.9.26, al., B.17.12, Hdt.1.114 (elsewh. fem., 2.62, 3.69, 83, 4.113), A.Th. 1041, S.Aj. 443, 495, etc.; acc. τινα Il.1.62, 5.761, etc., neut. τι 2.122, etc.: dual τινε Od.4.26, Pl.Sph. 237d, Prm. 143c, 149e: pl. τινες (Hom. only in

    οὔ τινες Od.6.279

    , 17.587 and οἵτινες (v. ὅστις)); [dialect] Dor. τινεν SIG527.127 (Drerus, iii B.C.); nom. and acc. neut. τινα (

    ὅτινα Il.22.450

    ), never in Trag., Ar., Th., or Hdt., f.l. in Isoc.4.74, first in Pl.Chrm. 163d, Ep. 325a, D.47.63, Hyp.Ath.19, Alex.110, Sotad.Com.1.22, Arist.EN 1094a5, IG42(1).121.35 (Epid., iv B.C.), etc.; ἄσσα (q.v.) Od.19.218, never in Trag. or Hdt.; [dialect] Att. ἄττα first in Th.1.113, 2.100, Ar.Ra. 173, al., Pl.R. 400a, etc., never in LXX, Plb., D.S., Str., revived by the Atticists, D.H.Comp.3, etc.; gen. [dialect] Ion. τεων Hdt.2.175, 5.57, τεῶν cj. for γε ῶν in 4.76; τινων not in Hdt., first in Ar.Eq. 977 (lyr.); dat. τισι, τισιν, first in Hdt. 9.113, X.Ath.1.18; N.-W. [dialect] Dor. τινοις GDI1409.5 (Delph., iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. τεοισι Hdt.8.113, 9.27 (for τεοις and τεον v. τεός); acc. τινας Il.15.735, Od.11.371 (also in οὕστινας, ὅτινας, v. ὅστις), etc.; neut. τινα (v. supr.):—any one, any thing, some one, some thing; and as Adj. any, some, and serving as the Indef. Art. a, an;

    θεός νύ τίς ἐστι κοτήεις Il.5.191

    ;

    καί τις θεὸς ἡγεμόνευεν Od.9.142

    ; οὐδέ τις αὐτὸν ἠείδη δμώων ib. 205; ἤ τι ὀϊσάμενος, ἢ.. ib. 339; μή τίς μοι ὑποδείσας ἀναδύη ib. 377, cf. 405- 410; εἴ τινά που μετ' ὄεσσι λάβοι ib. 418, cf. 421, al.; τις θεός construed as if τις θεῶν, 19.40, cf. 11.502, IG12.94.19, E.Hel. 1039.
    II special usages:
    1 some one (of many), i.e. many a one,

    ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν Il.7.201

    , etc.: sts. with meiosis, implying all or men, 13.638, Od.3.224; so in Prose, Hdt.5.49 fin., Th.2.37, etc.
    2 any one concerned, every one,

    εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω Il.2.382

    ; ἀλλά τις αὐτὸς ἴτω let every man come himself, 17.254;

    ἵνα τις στυγέῃσι καὶ ἄλλος 8.515

    , cf. 16.209, 17.227, al.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., even with the imper., τοῦτό τις.. ἴστω S Aj.417 (lyr.), cf. E.Ba. 346, Ar.Av. 1187;

    ἀγορεύω τινὶ ἐμὲ μὴ βασανίζειν Id.Ra. 628

    ; τοὺς ξυμμάχους αὐτόν τινα κολάζειν that every man should himself chastise his own allies, Th.1.40, cf. 6.77;

    ὅ τί τις ἐδύνατο Id.7.75

    ; ἄμεινόν τινος better than any others, D.21.66, cf. 19.35:—this is more fully expressed by adding other pronominal words,

    τις ἕκαστος Od.9.65

    , Th.6.31, etc.;

    πᾶς τις A.Ag. 1205

    , Hdt.6.80, Th.8.94, etc.;

    ἅπας τις Hdt.3.113

    , etc.;

    οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον Id.4.118

    . In these senses, τις is freq. combined with pl. words, οἱ κακοὶ.. οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ, for πρὶν ἐκβάλωσι, S.Aj. 965; οἷς ἂν ἐπίω, ἧσσόν τις πρόσεισι, for ἧσσον προσίασι, Th.4.85;

    ἐτόλμα τις.., ὁρῶντες Id.2.53

    , cf. 7.75; esp. after εἴ or ἤν τις, X. Mem.1.2.62, al.
    3 in reference to a definite person, whom one wishes to avoid naming, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ (i.e. Cyrus) Id.An.1.4.12, cf. Ar.Ra. 552, Theoc.5.122; so also euphem. for something bad,

    ἤν τι ποιῶμεν Th.2.74

    ;

    ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D.4.11

    : hence for the [ per.] 1st or [ per.] 2nd pers. Pron.,

    ἅ τιν' οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω Il.1.289

    , cf. S.Ant. 751; ποῖ τις τρέψεται; for ποῖ τρέψομαι; Ar.Th. 603, cf. S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), 1138, Th.4.59, X.An.3.4.40, 5.7.31, etc.
    4 indefinitely, where we say they, French on, sts. with an ironical force,

    φοβεῖταί τις A.Ch.59

    (lyr.);

    μισεῖ τις ἐκεῖνον D.4.8

    ; as voc., τὸν Πλοῦτον ἔξω τις κάλει call P. out, somebody, Ar.Pl. 1196.
    5 τις, τι may be opposed, expressly or by implication, to οὐδείς, οὐδέν, and mean somebody, something, by meiosis for some great one, some great thing, ηὔχεις τις εἶναι you boasted that you were somebody, E.El. 939;

    εἰσὶν ὅμως τινὲς οἱ εὐδοκιμοῦντες Arist.Pol. 1293b13

    ;

    τὸ δοκεῖν τιν' εἶναι Men.156

    ;

    τὸ δοκεῖν τινὲς εἶναι D.21.213

    ;

    ὡς σὲ μὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει δεῖ τινὰ φαίνεσθαι, τὴν πόλιν δ' ἐν τοῖς Ἕλλησι μηδενὸς ἀξίαν εἶναι Id.10.71

    ; κἠγών τις φαίνομαι ἦμεν after all I too am somebody, Theoc.11.79, cf. Act.Ap.5.36; also in neut.,

    οἴονταί τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι Pl.Ap. 41e

    , cf.Phd. 63c, Phdr. 243a, Euthd. 303c, etc.:— so τι λέγειν to be near the mark, opp. οὐδὲν λέγειν, Id.Prt. 339c, R. 329e, Phdr. 260a, etc.;

    ἵνα καὶ εἰδῶμεν εἴ τι ὅδε λέγει Id.Cra. 407e

    ;

    οἴεσθέ τι ποιεῖν, οὐδὲν ποιοῦντες Id.Smp. 173c

    .
    b τις is sts. opp. to another word,

    ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαί.., τέρπεται δὲ καί τις.. Pi.Fr. 221

    ;

    τισὶ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀποροῦσι συνεξέδωκε θυγατέρας.., τοὺς δ' ἐλύσατο ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων Lys.19.59

    ;

    μέρος μέν τι σιδήρου, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον LXX Da.2.33

    (more freq. with the Article, v. infr. 10 c); ἔστιν οὖν οὐ πᾶν τὸ ταχύ, ἀλλά τι (sic codd. BT)

    αὐτοῦ ἀγαστόν Pl.Cra. 412c

    ;

    ἀναγκαῖον ἤτοι πᾶσι τοῖς πολίταις ἀποδίδοσθαι πάσας ταύτας τὰς κρίσεις ἢ τισὶ πάσας.. ἢ τινὰς μὲν αὐτῶν πᾶσι τινὰς δὲ τισίν Arist.Pol. 1298a9

    , cf. 1277a23; τὸ μεῖζον τοῦθ' ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἑτέρου λέγεται· τινὸς γὰρ λέγεται μεῖζον greater than something, Id.Cat. 6a38;

    τὸ πρώτως ὂν καὶ οὐ τὶ ὂν ἀλλ' ὂν ἁπλῶς Id.Metaph. 1028a30

    ; πότερον τῷ τυχόντι ἢ τισίν; Id.Pol. 1269a26.
    6 with pr. names τις commonly signifies one named so-and-so,

    ἦν δέ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι Δάρης Il.5.9

    , cf. X.An.3.1.4, etc.; with a sense of contempt, Θερσίτης τις ἦν there was one Thersites, S.Ph. 442.
    b one of the same sort, converting the pr. name into an appellative, ἤ τις Ἀπόλλων ἢ Πάν an Apollo or a Pan, A.Ag.55 (anap.); [πόλιες] ταὶ μέλονται πρός τινος ἢ Διὸς ἢ γλαυκᾶς Ἀθάνας Lyr.in PVat.11v xi7;

    Σκύλλαν τινά A.Ag. 1233

    , cf.Ar.V. 181, Av. 512, Ra. 912: so also

    ὥς τις ἥλιος A.Ag. 288

    ; ἰσθμόν τιν' Ar. Th. 647.
    7 with Adjs. τις combines to express the idea of a Subst. used as predicate, ὥς τις θαρσαλέος καὶ ἀναιδής ἐσσι προΐκτης a bold and impudent beggar, Od.17.449, cf. 18.382, 20.140, Il.3.220; ἐγώ τις, ὡς ἔοικε, δυσμαθής a dull ard, Pl.R. 358a, cf. Prt. 340e; φόβου πλέα τις εἶ a cow ard, A.Pr. 696, cf. Th. 979(lyr.), Ag. 1140 (lyr.); ὡς ταχεῖά τις.. χάρις διαρρεῖ in what swift fashion ( = ταχέως πως), S.Aj. 1266, cf. OT 618, Hdt.4.198; δεινόν τι ποιεύμενος thinking it a terrible thing, Id.3.155, 5.33.
    8 with numerals and Adjs. expressing number, size, or the like , εἷς δέ τις ἀρχὸς ἀνὴρ.. ἔστω some one man, Il.1.144;

    ἕνα τιν' ἂν καθεῖσεν Ar.Ra. 911

    ;

    δώσει δέ τι ἕν γε φέρεσθαι Od.15.83

    ;

    τινὰ μίαν νύκτα Th.6.61

    ;

    προσκαλεσάμενός τινας δύο τῶν ἑκατονταρχῶν Act.Ap.23.23

    ; sts. the τις softens the definiteness of the numeral, ἑπτά τινες some seven, seven or so, Th.7.34;

    ἐς διακοσίους τινάς Id.3.111

    , cf. 7.87, 8.21; so without an actual numeral, ἡμέρας τινάς some days, i.e. several, Id.3.52; στρατῷ τινι of a certain amount, considerable, Id.8.3; ἐνιαυτόν τινα a year or so, Id.3.68; so οὐ πολλοί τινες, τινὲς οὐ πολλοί, A.Pers. 510, Th. 6.94, etc.; ὀλίγοι τινές or

    τινὲς ὀλίγοι Id.2.17

    , 3.7; οὔ τινα πολλὸν χρόνον no very long time, Hdt.5.48;

    τις στρατιὰ οὐ πολλή Th.6.61

    ; so also ὅσσος τις χρυσός what a store of gold, Od.10.45, cf. Hdt. 1.193, 2.18, etc.;

    κόσοι τινές Id.7.234

    ;

    πηλίκαι τινὲς τιμωρίαι Isoc. 20.3

    ;

    πολλὸς γάρ τις ἔκειτο Il.7.156

    ;

    ἐκ πολλοῦ τευ χρόνου Hdt. 2.58

    .
    9 with Pronominal words, ἀλλά τί μοι τόδε θυμὸς.. μερμηρίζει something, namely this, Od.20.38, cf. 380; οἷός τις what sort of a man, Il.5.638 (dub. l.), cf. Od.9.348, 20.377, Pl.Prt. 313a, etc.;

    ποῖός τις S.Ant.42

    , OC 1163, Hdt.3.34, X.An.7.6.24, etc.;

    ὁποῖός τις Id.Cyr.2.2.2

    , al.;

    εὐτυχίη τις τοιήδε Hdt.3.139

    , cf. X.Mem.1.1.1, etc.;

    τοιοῦτός τις Id.An.5.8.7

    .
    10 with the Article,
    a when a noun with the Art. is in appos. with τις, as ὅταν δ' ὁ κύριος παρῇ τις when the person in authority, whoever he be, is here, S.OC 289; τοὺς αὐτοέντας.. τιμωρεῖν τινας (v.l. τινα) Id.OT 107.
    b in Philosophic writers, τις is added to the Art. to show that the Art. is used to denote a particular individual who is not specified in the general formula, although he would be in the particular case, ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος the individual man (whoever he may be), this or that man, opp. ἄνθρωπος (man in general), ὁ τὶς ἵππος, ἡ τὶς γραμματική, Arist.Cat. 1b4, 8; τὸ τὶ μέγεθος, opp. ὅλως τὸ μέγεθος, Id.Pol. 1283a4, cf. S.E.P.2.223; but in

    ἑνὸς γὰρ τό γε τὶ φήσεις σημεῖον εἶναι Pl.Sph. 237d

    , the Art. is used as in Il. cc. s.v. ,

    , τό B.1.5

    : later ὅ τις (or ὁ τὶς ) much like ὁ δεῖνα, δεῦρο ὅ τις θεός, ὄφθητί μοι in a general formula of invocation, PMag.Par.1.236; αἴρω σε, ἥ τις βοτάνη ib.287; εἰς τήν τινα κρείαν (leg. χρείαν) ib.289.
    c freq. in opposed clauses,

    ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δὲ.. E.Med. 1141

    , Hec. 624, Pl.Phd. 99b, etc.;

    ὁ μέν τις.., ἄλλος δὲ.. E.IT 1407

    ;

    ὁ μὲν.., ὁ δέ τις.. X.Cyr.1.4.15

    : pl.,

    οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.. Hdt.1.127

    , cf. Th.2.91;

    οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.., οἱ δέ τινες X.Cyr.3.2.10

    , etc.; οἱ μὲν.., οἱ δέ τινες.. ib.6.1.26, etc.: also combined with other alternative words,

    ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.., ἕτερος δέ τις.. Id.Smp.2.6

    ; ὁ μὲν.., ἕτερος δέ τις.., ὁ δὲ.. , etc., Ar. Pl. 162 sq.: also in neut.,

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Pl.Ep. 358a

    ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δὲ.. Hdt.3.40

    ; in adverb. sense, τὸ μὲν.., τὸ δέ τι.. partly.., partly.., Plb.1.73.4; and τι remains unaltered even when the Art. is pl.,

    τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι X.An.4.1.14

    , cf. HG7.1.46; also τὸ δέ τι.. but in some measure.., without τὸ μέν preceding, Th.1.107, cf. 118, 7.48.
    d later τις is used as in b supr. but without the Art., γράψον.. ὅτι τι καί τι εἴληφας that you have received such and such things, POxy.937.22 (iii A.D.); κληρονόμους καταλείπω τὴν θυγατέρα μού τινα καὶ τὸν σύντροφον αὐτῆς τινα καί τινα ib.1034.2 (ii A.D.); τίς τινι χαίρειν A to B greeting (in a draft letter), ib. 509 (ii A.D.).
    II the neut. τι is used,
    a collectively, ἦν τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις there was a party.., Th.7.48; so perh. τῶν ἄλλων οὔ πέρ τι πεφυγμένον ἐστ' Ἀφροδίτην, οὔτε θεῶν, οὔτ' ἀνθρώπων no class, h.Ven.34 (but masc. τις in h.Merc. 143).
    b euphem. for something bad, v. supr. 3.
    c joined with Verbs, somewhat, in any degree, at all,

    ἦ ῥά τί μοι κεχολώσεαι Il.5.421

    ;

    παρεθάρρυνέ τι αὐτούς X.HG6.4.7

    , etc.: with Adjs. or Adverbs, οὕτω δή τι ἰσχυραί, οὕτω δή τι πολύγονον, etc., Hdt.3.12, 108, cf. 4.52; so also

    ὀλίγον τι ἧσσον Od.15.365

    ;

    οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον Hdt.6.123

    , etc.;

    ἧσσόν τι Th.3.75

    , etc.; οὐ πάνυ τι, πολύ τι, σχεδόν τι, v. πάνυ 1.3,

    πολύς 111.1a

    , 2a, σχεδόν IV; also in conjunction with

    οὐδέν, μηδέν, οὐδέν τι πάντως Hdt.6.3

    ; οὐδέν, μηδέν τι μᾶλλον, E.Alc. 522, S.Aj. 280;

    μηδέν τι λίαν E.Andr. 1234

    :—also καί τι καὶ.. ὑποψίᾳ in part also from suspicion, Th.1.107;

    καί πού τι καί Pi.O.1.28

    .
    12 τίς τε freq. in Hom.,

    ὡς ὅτε τίς τε Il.3.33

    , 4.141, v. τε B.
    13 ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς few or none, next to none, Hdt.3.140, X.Cyr.7.5.45, D.C.47.5, 48.4; ἤ τι ἢ οὐδέν little or nothing, Pl.Ap. 17b;

    ἢ οὐδεὶς ἤ τις D.C.41.62

    (s. v.l.).
    14 τις is pleonast. in such phrases as οὐδέν τι or μηδέν τι, v. supr. 11c.
    b repeated in successive clauses,

    ὅσα λέγει τις ἢ πράσσειτις ἢψέγειν ἔχει S.Ant. 689

    ;

    εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται Id.Tr. 944

    (where however κἄτι πλείους is prob. cj.), cf. E.Or. 1218 (whereas τις is sts. omitted in the first clause,

    οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν A.Pr.21

    , cf. S.Tr.3): but in E.Andr. 734, ἔστι γάρ τις οὐ πρόσω.. πόλις τις, the repetition is pleonastic, as also in A.Supp.57 sq. (lyr., s. v.l.).
    15 τις is sts. omitted, οὐδέ κεν ἔνθα τεόν γε μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο (sc. τις) Il.13.287; ὡς δ' ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται (sc. τις)

    φεύγοντα διώκειν 22.199

    , cf. S.OC 1226 (lyr.), Leg.Gort.2.2, X.Smp.5.2, Pl.Grg. 456d: τις must often be supplied from what goes before, ib. 478c, Prt. 319d.
    b sts. also τις is omitted before a gen. case which must depend upon it, as

    ἢ [τις] τᾶς ἀσώτου Σισυφιδᾶν γενεᾶς S.Aj. 189

    (lyr.); ἢν γαμῇ ποτ' αὐτὸς ἢ [τις]

    τῶν ξυγγενῶν Ar.Nu. 1128

    ;

    ἐν τῶν πόλεων IG12.56.14

    .--Cf. ὅστις, οὔτις, μήτις, ἄλλο τι.
    1 accentuation: τις is normally enclitic, but in certain uses is orthotone, i.e. theoretically oxytone (τίς, τινά, τινές, τινῶν, etc., cf. Choerob. in Theod.1.373 H.) and barytone when followed by another word ( τὶς or τις, τινὰ, τινὲς, τινῶν, etc.). According to Sch. D.T.p.240 H. its orthotone accent is τίς (not τὶς) , τίνα, τίνες, etc. The orthotone form is used in codd.:
    a at the beginning of a sentence, τίς ἔνδον.. ; is any one within? A.Ch. 654 ( τὶς cj. Hermann); τί φημι; = λέγω τι; am I saying anything? S.Tr. 865, OT 1471; <τίς ἦλθε;> ἦλθέ τις has anybody come? Somebody has come, Sch.D.T. l.c.; τὶς κάθηται, τὶς περιπατεῖ, so and so is sitting (walking), S.E.M.8.97; τὶς αἰπόλος καλούμενος Κομάτας Sch.Theoc.7.78;

    τίς ποτε οἰκοδεσπότης.. ἐκοπία Aesop.

    in Gloss. iii p.41; or after a pause,

    πῶς γὰρ ἄν, ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ βέλτιστε, τὶς ἀποκρίναιτο Pl.R. 337e

    ; τι οὖν ([etym.] τὶς ἂν εἴποι) ταῦτα λέγεις; D.1.14 (v.l.);

    ἔντοσθεν δὲ γυνά, τι θεῶν δαίδαλμα Theoc.1.32

    ;

    οὐ γυμνὸν τὸ φίλαμα, τι δ' ὦ ξένε καὶ πλέον ἑξεῖς Mosch.1.5

    (v.l. for τὺ).
    b when τις is opp. to another τις or to some other word,

    τισὶ μὲν συμφέρει, τισὶ δ' οὐ συμφέρει Arist.Pol. 1284b40

    , cf. Th.2.92, Pl.Cri. 49a, D. 9.2;

    τινὲς μὲν οὖν.., ἡμεῖς δὲ.. Sor.1.1

    ;

    τὸ τὶ μὲν ψεῦδος ἔχον, τὶ δὲ ἀληθές S.E.M.8.127

    ;

    ἀλλὰ τινὰ μὲν.., τινὰ δὲ.. Gem.14.6

    ;

    ποτὲ μὲν πρὸς πάντα, ποτὲ δὲ πρὸς τινά Sor.1.48

    : without such opposition, τοῦτ' εἰς ἀνίαν τοὔπος ἔρχεται τινί for a certain person, S.Aj. 1138. Codd. are not consistent; in signf.11.5a, 10c, 13 they make it enclitic; in signf. 11.5b sts. enclitic, sts. orthotone (v. supr.); sts. enclitic and orthotone in the same sentence,

    πάντα δὲ τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπό τέ τινος γίγνεται καὶ ἔκ τινος καὶ τί Arist.Metaph. 1032a14

    , cf. Pl.Chrm. 165c.
    2 position:
    a τις is rarely first word in the sentence, and rarely follows a pause (v. supr. 111.1a, b); it may stand second word,

    ἔσκε τις ἐνθάδε μάντις ἀνήρ Od.9.508

    , cf. Il.8.515, 23.331; but in general its position is not far before or after the word to which it belongs in sense,

    ἀλλ' ἄγε δή τινα μάντιν ἐρείομεν 1.62

    ;

    φυλακὴ δέ τις ἔμπεδος ἔστω 8.521

    .
    b in [dialect] Ion. Prose it sts. stands between its genitive and the Article of that genitive,

    τῶν τις Περσέων Hdt.1.85

    ;

    τῶν τις ἱρέων Id.2.38

    ;

    τῶν τινες Φοινίκων Id.8.90

    ;

    ἐς τῶν τι ἄλλο στομάτων τοῦ Νείλου Id.2.179

    ; so also in late Prose, Ath.3.108d, Eust.1402.18, 1659.27, 1676.1.
    c it stands between the Art. and Subst. in signf.11.10b.
    d τίς τι is the correct order, not τί τις, IG12.110.46, Th.7.10, X.An.4.1.14 (codd. dett.), D.22.22, etc.
    e whereas in [dialect] Att. the order ἐάν τις is compulsory, in [dialect] Dor. the usual order is αἴ τίς κα, Leg.Gort.9.43, al., Tab.Heracl.1.105, al. (but

    αἴ κά τις Epich.35

    , 159;

    αἰ δέ κα μή τις Leg.Gort.5.13

    ): later [dialect] Dor.

    εἴ τί κα GDI2101.3

    , al.; καἴ τι ἂν ( = καὶ εἴ τι ἂν) IG5(1).1390.50 (Andania, i B.C., v. infr. B.11.1b):—this [dialect] Dor. order influenced the Koine, as in the rare

    εἴ τις ἂν Plu.TG15

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τις

  • 17 φάσκω

    φάσκω, used by [dialect] Ep. only in [tense] impf.
    A

    ἔφασκον Il.13.100

    ; [dialect] Ep.

    φάσκον Od.24.75

    , Hes.Th. 209: freq. in Trag. and Com. (but perh. never in [tense] pres. indic., v. infr.): as [tense] impf. of

    φημί S.OT 110

    , etc., also Ar. Ra. 742; also imper.

    φάσκε E.Hel. 1077

    , Arist.Rh.Al. 1429a6; subj.

    φάσκω A.Ch.93

    , Ar.V. 561 (anap.), Antipho 3.4.3, Lys.25.11, Is.10.11, PHal.1.134 (iii B. C.); opt.

    φάσκοιμι S.Aj. 1037

    , D.30.27; inf.

    φάσκειν S.El.9

    , OT 462, Ph. 1411 (anap.), Ar.Ra. 695 (troch.), X.Mem.1.2.52, al., Isoc.8.1; part.

    φάσκων IG12.66.6

    , E.HF 1382 (the only part of the Verb used in Th. (3.70 ) and Pl. (R. 337e, al.), exc.

    ἔφασκεν Id.Lg. 901a

    ):—[voice] Pass. is not found, ἐφάσκετ' is for

    ἐφάσκετε S.Ph. 114

    . Rare in [tense] pres. indic. before iii B.C.:

    φάσκει Is.6.16

    ( φάσκοι Reiske, Wyse), PMich.Zen.82.6 (iii B. C.), PSI8.921.7 (ii A. D.), dub. in S.E.P. 1.17 (v.l. φάσκοι), Gal.15.35, Gp.9.14.2, Hsch.;

    φάσκεις PSI9.1011.10

    (iii B. C.); φάσκουσι ([etym.] ν) Aeschin.Ep.11.11, PCair.Zen.21.25, 244.5, al. (iii B. C.), Plu.Ant.86, Ath.10.429b, Gp.5.2.9, etc.; φάσκομεν is dub. cj. (for πάσχομεν ) in Alex.146.4:—say, affirm, assert, c. acc. et inf., Od.4.191, 8.565, al.; φάσκειν as imper., in this constr., S.OT 462, Ph. 1411 (anap.); οὐ φασκόντων χρήσειν saying they would not.., Hdt. 3.58;

    οὐ φάσκων ἀνεκτὸν εἶναι Th.8.52

    ; the inf. is freq. to be supplied, ἐν τῇδ' ἔφασκε γῇ (sc. εὑρεθήσεσθαι) S.OT 110; φησίν γε· φάσκων δ' (sc. ἥξειν) Id.El. 319; τῶν φασκόντων γονέων (sc. εἶναι) Pl. R. 538a, etc.; rarely φ. ὡς.., ὅτι.., Mosch.2.12, Plu.2.215f: c. acc.,

    τοῦτο φ. τοὔπος A.Ch.93

    , cf. E.HF 1382, etc.: abs.,

    ὡς ἔφασκεν S.OT 114

    ;

    φάσκουσα καὶ οὐ φάσκουσα Pl.Tht. 190a

    .
    2 think, deem, expect,

    ὃ οὔ ποτ' ἔγωγε τελευτήσεσθαι ἔφασκον Il.13.100

    ;

    οὔ μ' ἐφάσκεθ'.. οἴκαδ' ἱκέσθαι Od.22.35

    ; φάσκειν.. ὁρᾶν believe that you see, S.El.9.
    3 say, promise, c. inf. [tense] fut.,

    με.. ἔφασκε θήσειν ἀθάνατον Od.7.256

    ;

    φάσκων προσποιήσειν αὐτήν Th.2.85

    , cf. Pl. Ion 541e.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φάσκω

  • 18 πολύς

    πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, οῦ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.) ‘much’.—Comparative πλείων, πλεῖον (18 times in the NT, 4 times in the Apost. Fathers [including Hv 3, 6, 4; Hs 8, 1, 16] and Ath. 12, 3) or πλέον (Lk 3:13 and Ac 15:28 μηδὲν πλέον; otherwise, πλέον in the NT only J 21:15; 14 times in the Apost. Fathers [incl. μηδὲν πλέον Hs 1, 1, 6]; Ar. twice; Just. 6 times; Tat. once; Ath. 7 times), ονος; pl. πλείονες, and acc. πλείονας contracted πλείους, neut. πλείονα and πλείω (the latter Mt 26:53 [πλεῖον, πλείου vv.ll.]; B-D-F §30, 2; Mlt-H. 82; Thackeray p. 81f; Mayser p. 68f) ‘more’ (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27=Stone p. 70 [πλείον]; TestJob 35:2; TestGad 7:2 [πλεῖον]; AscIs 3:8; [πλέον]; EpArist; apolog. exc. Mel.).—Superlative πλεῖστος, η, ον ‘most’ (Hom.+).
    pert. to being a large number, many, a great number of
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj., preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun) in the pl. many, numerous δυνάμεις πολλαί many mighty deeds Mt 7:22b. δαιμονιζόμενοι πολλοί 8:16. Cp. vs. 30; 9:10; 13:17; 24:11; 27:52, 55; Mk 2:15a; 6:13; 12:41; Lk 4:25, 27; 7:21b; 10:24; J 10:32; 14:2; Ac 1:3; 2:43; 8:7b; 14:22; Ro 4:17f (Gen 17:5); 8:29; 12:4; 1 Cor 8:5ab; 11:30; 12:12a, 20; 1 Ti 6:12; 2 Ti 2:2; Hb 2:10; 1J 4:1; 2J 7; Rv 5:11; 9:9; 10:11; 1 Cl 55:3ab. ἔτη πολλά many years: Lk 12:19b (εἰς ἔτη π.); Ac 24:10 (ἐκ π. ἐτῶν); Ro 15:23 (ἀπὸ π. [v.l. ἱκανῶν] ἐτῶν).—αἱ ἁμαρτίαι αἱ πολλαί Lk 7:47a. αἱ εὐεργεσίαι αἱ π. 1 Cl 21:1.—πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα many serious charges Ac 25:7 (cp. Ps.-Pla., Sisyph. 1, 387a πολλά τε καὶ καλὰ πράγματα; B-D-F §442, 11; Rob. 655). πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα J 20:30 (on the form X., Hell. 5, 4, 1 πολλὰ μὲν οὖν … καὶ ἄλλα λέγειν καὶ Ἑλληνικὰ καὶ βαρβαρικά; Dionys. Hal. 2, 67, 5; Ps.-Demetr. 142 πολλὰς κ. ἄλλας χάριτας; Jos., Ant. 3, 318; Tat. 38, 1. On the subject-matter Bultmann 540, 3; also Porphyr., Vi. Pyth. 28 after a miracle-story: μυρία δʼ ἕτερα θαυμαστότερα κ. θειότερα περὶ τἀνδρὸς … εἴρηται κτλ.).—ἄλλοι πολλοί many others IRo 10:1. ἄλλαι πολλαί Mk 15:41. ἄλλα πολλά (Jos., Bell. 6, 169, Ant. 9, 242; Just., D. 8, 1) J 21:25. ἕτεροι πολλοί Ac 15:35. ἕτερα πολλά (Jos., Vi. 39) Lk 22:65.—Predicative: πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐισερχόμενοι Mt 7:13.—Mk 5:9; 6:31; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). AcPl Ha 5, 16.—οὐ πολλοί not many=( only) a few οὐ πολλαὶ ἡμέραι (Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13; J 2:12; Ac 1:5; AcPl Ha 11, 1. οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοί not many wise (people) 1 Cor 1:26a; cp. bc. οὐ πολλοί πατέρες not many fathers 4:15.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. persons—without the art. Mt 7:22; 8:11; 12:15; 20:28; 24:5ab; 26:28; Mk 2:2; 3:10 (Mt 12:15 has ascensive πάντας; other passages to be compared in this connection are Mk 10:45=Mt 20:28 πολλῶν and 1 Ti 2:6 πάντων. Cp. the double tradition of the saying of Bias in Clem. of Alex., Strom. 1, 61, 3 πάντες ἄνθρωποι κακοὶ ἢ οἱ πλεῖστοι τ. ἀνθρώπων κακοί.—On Mk 10:45 s. OCullmann, TZ 4, ’48, 471–73); 6:2; 11:8; Lk 1:1 (cp. Herm. Wr. 11, 1, 1b and see JBauer, NovT 4, ’60, 263–66), 14; J 2:23; 8:30; Ac 9:42; Ro 16:2; 2 Cor 11:18; Gal 3:16 (πολλοί= a plurality); Tit 1:10; Hb 12:15; 2 Pt 2:2. AcPl Ha 5, 8; 7, 5; 11, 3. Opp. ὀλίγοι Mt 22:14; 20:16 v.l. (cp. Pla., Phd. 69c ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί, βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι=the thyrsus-bearers [officials] are many, but the truly inspired are few)—W. a partitive gen. πολλοὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων Mt 3:7. π. πῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ Lk 1:16.—J 4:39; 12:11; Ac 4:4; 8:7a; 13:43; 18:8; 19:18; 2 Cor 12:21; Rv 8:11.—W. ἐκ and gen. (AscIs 3:1; Jos., Ant. 11, 151) πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν J 6:60, 66.—10:20; 11:19, 45; 12:42; Ac 17:12. ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου πολλοί J 7:31 (Appian, Iber. 78 §337 πολλοὶ ἐκ τοῦ πλήθους).
    ב. πολλά—many things, much without the art.: γράφειν write at length B 4:9. διδάσκειν Mk 4:2; 6:34b. λαλεῖν Mt 13:3. μηχανᾶσθαι MPol 3. πάσχειν (Pind., O. 13, 63 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 268; 403) Mt 16:21; Mk 5:26a; 9:12; Lk 9:22; 17:25; B 7:11; AcPl Ha 8, 19. ποιεῖν Mk 6:20 v.l. United w. another neut. by καί (Lucian, Icar. 20 πολλὰ κ. δεινά; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 345 D.: πολλὰ κ. καλά; Ps.-Demetr., El. 70 πολλὰ κ. ἄλλα; likew. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §53; Arrian, Anab. 6, 11, 2) πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα many other things Lk 3:18. πολλὰ ἂν κ. ἄλλα εἰπεῖν ἔχοιμι Dg 2:10 (Eur., Ep. 3, 2, πολλὰ κ. ἕτερα εἰπεῖν ἔχω; Diod S 17, 38, 3 πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα … διαλεχθείς). ἐν πολλοῖς in many ways (Diod S 26, 1, 2; OGI 737, 7 [II B.C.]; Just., D. 124, 4 [of line of proof]) 2 Cor 8:22a. ἐπὶ πολλῶν (opp. ἐπὶ ὀλίγα) over many things Mt 25:21, 23.—W. art. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) τὰ πολλὰ πράσσειν transact a great deal of business Hs 4:5b.
    γ. elliptical δαρήσεται πολλά (sc. πληγάς) will receive many (lashes) Lk 12:47 (B-D-F §154; 241, 6).
    comparative πλείων, πλεῖον
    α. adj. w. a plural (Diod S 14, 6, 1 μισθοφόρους πλείους=many mercenaries) πλείονας πόνους (opp. οὐχ ἕνα οὐδὲ δύο) 1 Cl 5:4. ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους for a (large) number of days, for many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277; cp. Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 29 πλείονας ἡμ.) Ac 13:31.—21:10 (Jos., Ant. 16, 15); 24:17; 25:14; 27:20. οἱ μὲν πλείονές εἰσιν γεγονότες ἱερεῖς the priests of former times existed in greater numbers Hb 7:23. ἑτέροις λόγοις πλείοσιν in many more words (than have been reported) Ac 2:40. ταῦτα καὶ ἕτερα πλείονα MPol 12:1.—W. a gen. of comparison (Just., A I 53, 3; Tat. 3, 2) ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων other slaves, more than (he had sent) at first Mt 21:36. πλείονα σημεῖα ὧν more signs than those which J 7:31. Also w. ἤ: πλείονας μαθητὰς ἤ more disciples than 4:1. After πλείονες (-α) before numerals the word for ‘than’ is omitted (B-D-F §185, 4; Kühner-G. II 311; Rob. 666; Jos., Ant. 14, 96) ἐτῶν ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος the man was more than 40 years old Ac 4:22. πλείους τεσσεράκοντα 23:13, 21. Cp. 24:11; 25:6 (Jos., Ant. 6, 306 δέκα οὐ πλείους ἡμέρας).—The ref. is to relative extent (cp. 2bα) in τὰ ἔργα σου τὰ ἕσχατα πλείονα τῶν πρώτων your deeds, the latter of which are greater than the former Rv 2:19.
    β. subst.
    א. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους the majority, most (Diog. L. 1, 20; 22; Jos., Ant. 10, 114) Ac 19:32; 27:12. W. ἐξ: ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείονες most of whom 1 Cor 15:6. W. gen. and a neg. (litotes) οὐκ ἐν τ. πλείοσιν αὐτῶν ηὐδόκησεν ὁ θεός God was pleased with only a few of them 10:5. This is perh. (s. ג below) the place for 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6; 9:2. Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ב. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους (even) more πλείονες in even greater numbers Ac 28:23. πολλῷ πλείους ἐπίστευσαν many more came to believe J 4:41.—διὰ τῶν πλειόνων to more and more people=those who are still to be won for Christ 2 Cor 4:15.
    ג. (οἱ) πλείονες, (οἱ) πλείους. In contrast to a minority οἱ πλείονες can gain the sense the others, the rest (so τὰ πλείονα Soph., Oed. Col. 36; τὸ πλέον Thu. 4, 30, 4; Jos., Ant. 12, 240; B-D-F §244, 3). So perh. (s. א above) ἵνα τ. πλείονας κερδήσω (opp. the apostle himself) 1 Cor 9:19; 2 Cor 2:6 (opp. the one who has been punished too severely.—In this case [s. א above] his punishment would have been determined by a unanimous vote of the Christian assembly rather than by a majority). Cp. 9:2; Phil 1:14; MPol 5:1.
    ד. πλείονα (for πλεῖον) more Mt 20:10 v.l.; various things Lk 11:53. ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλείονα 1 Cl 24:5 (s. as adv. ParJer 7:26).
    superl. adj. πλείστη w. a plural most of αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις Mt 11:20 (difft. B-D-F §245, 1).
    pert. to being relatively large in quantity or measure, much, extensive
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. adj. preceding or following a noun (or ptc. or adj. used as a noun)
    א. in the sg. much, large, great πολὺς ἀριθμός Ac 11:21. W. words that in themselves denote a plurality (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 80 §338 στρατὸς πολύς) πολὺς ὄχλος (s. ὄχ. 1a) Mt 14:14; 20:29; 26:47; Mk 5:21, 24; 6:34a; 8:1; 9:14; 12:37 (ὁ π. ὄχ.); Lk 5:29; 6:17a; 8:4; J 6:2, 5 (for the expression ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, in which π. follows the noun, J 12:9, 12, cp. Arrian, Anab. 1, 9, 6 ὁ φόνος πολύς); Ac 6:7; Rv 7:9; 19:1, 6. πολὺ πλῆθος (s. pl. 2bα) Mk 3:7f; Lk 5:6; 6:17b; 23:27; Ac 14:1; 17:4; 1 Cl 6:1. λαὸς πολύς many people Ac 18:10. Of money and its value, also used in imagery μισθὸς πολύς Mt 5:12; Lk 6:23, 35 (all three predicative, as Gen 15:1). ἐργασία π. Ac 16:16. π. κεφάλαιον 22:28. χρυσοῦ πολλοῦ … τρυφῆς πολλῆς AcPl Ha 2, 19.—Of things that occur in the mass or in large quantities (Diod S 3, 50, 1 πολλὴ ἄμπελος) γῆ πολλή Mt 13:5; Mk 4:5; θερισμὸς π. Mt 9:37; Lk 10:2 (both pred.). χόρτος π. J 6:10; καρπὸς π. (Cyranides p. 121, 11) 12:24; 15:5, 8.—λόγος π. a long speech (Diod S 13, 1, 2; Just., D. 123, 7) Ac 15:32; 20:2. περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11 (cp. Pla., Phd. 115d).—Of time: πολὺς χρόνος a long time (Hom. et al.; Demetr.(?): 722 Fgm. 7; Jos., Ant. 8, 342; 19, 28; Just., A II, 2, 11) J 5:6 (s. ἔχω 7b); Hs 6, 4, 4 (pred.). μετὰ πολὺν χρόνον (Jos., Ant. 12, 324) Mt 25:19. Differently Mk 6:35ab (s. 3aα).
    ב. adj. w. a noun in the pl. many, large, great, extensive, plentiful ὄχλοι πολλοί great crowds or probably better many people (as Diod S 20, 59, 2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 3. For the corresponding mng. of ὄχλοι s. ὄχλος 1a) Mt 4:25; 8:1; 13:2; 15:30a; 19:2; Lk 5:15; 14:25. κτήματα πολλά a great deal of property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22 (cp. Da 11:28 χρήματα π.). ὕδατα πολλά much water, many waters (Maximus Tyr. 21, 3g of the Nile ὁ πολὺς ποταμός, likew. Procop. Soph., Ep. 111) J 3:23; Rv 1:15; 14:2; 17:1; 19:6b. θυμιάματα πολλά a great deal of incense 8:3. τὰ πολλὰ γράμματα Ac 26:24. πολλοὶ χρόνοι long periods of time (Plut., Thes. 6, 9). πολλοῖς χρόνοις for long periods of time (SIG 836, 6; pap) Lk 8:29; 1 Cl 44:3. χρόνοις πολλοῖς AcPlCor 2:10. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων (Diod S 3, 47, 8; Jos., Ant. 14, 110; 17, 204) 1 Cl 42:5.
    β. subst.
    א. πολλοί many i.e. pers.—w. the art. οἱ πολλοί the many, of whatever appears in the context Mk 6:2 v.l. (the many people who were present in the synagogue); 9:26b (the whole crowd). Opp. ὁ εἷς Ro 5:15ac, 19ab; the many who form the ἓν σῶμα the one body 12:5; 1 Cor 10:17. Paul pays attention to the interests of the many rather than to his own vs. 33 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 212).—The majority, most (X., An. 5, 6, 19; Appian, Maced. 7, Bell. Civ. 4, 73 §309; 2 Macc 1:36; En 104:10; AscIs 3:26; Jos., Ant. 17, 72; Just., D. 4, 3) Mt 24:12; Hb 12:15 v.l. W. a connotation of disapproval most people, the crowd (Socrat., Ep. 6, 2; Dio Chrys. 15 [32], 8; Epict. 1, 3, 4; 2, 1, 22 al.; Plut., Mor. 33a; 470b; Plotinus, Enn. 2, 9, 9; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 42) 2 Cor 2:17; Pol 2:1; 7:2.—Jeremias, The Eucharistic Words of Jesus3, tr. NPerrin, ’66, 179–82; 226–31, and TW VI 536–45: πολλοί.
    ב. πολύ much ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολὺ κτλ. Lk 12:48 (Just., A I, 17, 4 twice πλέον). Cp. 16:10ab; 2 Cl 8:5; καρποφορεῖν π. bear much fruit Hs 2:3. πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον much in every way Ro 3:2 (Ael. Aristid. 34, 43 K.=50 p. 562 D. gives answer to a sim. quest. asked by himself: πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα).—Js 5:16.—As gen. of price πολλοῦ for a large sum of money (Menand., Fgm. 197 Kö.; PRyl 244, 10. S. στρουθίον.) Mt 26:9.—Of time: ἐπὶ πολύ ( for) a long time (JosAs 19:3; Ar. 65, 3; s. also ἐπί 18cβ) Ac 28:6; AcPl Ha 10, 21. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon afterward Ac 27:14 (μετά B 2c).—ἐπὶ πολύ more than once, often (Is 55:7) Hm 4, 1, 8.—Before a comp. (as Hom. et al.; B-D-F §246; Rob. 664) in the acc. πολὺ βέλτιον much better Hs 1:9. π. ἐλάττων v 3, 7, 6 (Ar. 6, 2). π. μᾶλλον much more, to a much greater degree (Dio Chrys. 2, 10; 17; 64 al.; Ael. Aristid. 34, 9 K.=50 p. 549 D.; Just., A II, 8, 3; D. 95, 1 al.) Hb 12:9, 25 (by means of a negative it acquires the mng. much less; cp. Diod S 7, 14, 6 πολὺ μᾶλλον μὴ … =even much less); Dg 2:7b. π. πλέον 2:7a (Ar. 11, 7). π. σπουδαιότερος 2 Cor 8:22b. Cp. π. τιμώτερον 1 Pt 1:7 v.l.; in the dat. of degree of difference πολλῷ μᾶλλον (Thu. 2, 51, 4; UPZ 42, 48 [162 B.C.]; EpArist 7; 24 al.; Sir prol. ln. 14; Jos., Ant. 18, 184; Just., A I, 68, 9; Tat. 17, 4) Mt 6:30; Mk 10:48b; Lk 18:39; Ro 5:9f, 15b, 17; 1 Cor 12:22; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; Phil 2:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρείσσον 1:23 (v.l. without μᾶλλον). πολλῷ πλείους J 4:41. πολλῷ στρουθίων as v.l. Mt 20:31 and Lk 12:7 (both N.25 app.; on the strong ms. support for this rdg. s. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 21–24).—W. the art. τὸ πολύ (opp. τὸ ὀλίγον as X., An. 7, 7, 36) 2 Cor 8:15 (cp. Ex 16:18).
    ג. πολύς (Diod S 14, 107, 4 πολὺς ἦν ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ=he was strongly inclined toward punishing) μὴ πολὺς ἐν ῥήμασιν γίνου do not be profuse in speech, do not gossip 1 Cl 30:5 (Job 11:3).—Παπίας ὁ πολύς Papias (7), prob. to be understood as ὁ πάνυ; s. πάνυ d.
    comp. πλείων, πλεῖον; adv. πλειόνως
    α. adj., w. a singular (TestJob 35:2 διὰ πλείονος εὐωδίας) καρπὸν πλείονα more fruit J 15:2, 8 P66; Hs 5, 2, 4. τὸ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου the greater part of the throng 8, 1, 16. ἐπὶ πλείονα χρόνον for a longer time (PTebt 6:31 [II B.C.]) Ac 18:20. Foll. by gen. of comparison: πλείονα τιμήν more honor Hb 3:3b.—IPol 1:3a. Foll. by παρά τινα for comparison Hb 3:3a; 11:4; Hs 9, 18, 2. ὅσῳ πλείονος κατηξιώθημεν γνώσεως, τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον 1 Cl 41:4.—τὸ πλεῖον μέρος as adv. acc. for the greater part Hv 3, 6, 4a.
    β. as subst. πλεῖον, πλέον more τὸ πλεῖον the greater sum (cp. Diod S 1, 82, 2=the greater part; Ps 89:10) Lk 7:43. πλεῖον λαμβάνειν receive a larger sum Mt 20:10. W. partitive gen. ἐπὶ πλεῖον προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας they will arrive at an ever greater measure of impiety=become more and more deeply involved in impiety 2 Ti 2:16. W. a gen. of comparison πλεῖον τῆς τροφῆς someth. greater (more important) than food Mt 6:25; Lk 12:23. πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ Mt 12:41; cp. vs. 42; Lk 11:31, 32. ἡ χήρα πλεῖον πάντων ἔβαλεν the widow put in more than all the rest Mk 12:43; Lk 21:3. μηδὲν πλέον nothing more (Jos., Bell. 1, 43; cp. Just., D. 2, 3 οὐδὲν πλέον); the words than, except following are expressed by παρά and the acc. Lk 3:13 or by πλήν w. gen. Ac 15:28, w. εἰ μή Hs 1:6.—The acc. is used as an adv. more, in greater measure, to a greater degree (Herm. Wr. 13, 21 Nock after the mss.) Lk 7:42; IRo 1:1; IEph 6:2; w. a gen. of comparison Mt 5:20 (περισσεύω 1aβ); J 21:15; IPol 5:2 (s. Ad’Alès, RSR 25, ’35, 489–92). τριετίαν ἢ καὶ πλεῖον for three years or even more Ac 20:18 D (cp. TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 27 [Stone p. 70, 27]).—ἐπὶ πλεῖον any farther (of place) Ac 4:17 (TestGad 7:2; Ath. 12 [ἐπί 4bβ]); (of time) at length Ac 20:9 (ἐπί 18cβ) or any longer, too long 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1 (ἐπί 18cβ); any more, even more (ἐπί 13) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). Strengthened πολὺ πλέον much more, much rather (4 Macc 1:8; cp. X., An. 7, 5, 15; BGU 180, 12f [172 A.D.] πολλῷ πλεῖον; Ar. 11, 7 πολλῷ πλεῖον) Dg 2:7; 4:5.—Also w. indications of number (s. 1bα) πλεῖον ἢ ἄρτοι πέντε Lk 9:13 (the words πλ. ἤ outside the constr. as X., An. 1, 2, 11). In πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων more than twelve legions of angels Mt 26:53 the text is uncertain (B-D-F §185, 4; s. Rob. 666).—The adv. can also be expressed by πλειόνως (Aeneas Tact. 237; Jos., Ant. 17, 2; Leontios 24, p. 52, 10) more ὅσον … πλειόνως the more … the more IEph 6:1.
    superl. πλεῖστος, ον
    α. adj.
    א. superlative proper τὸ πλεῖστον μέρος the greatest part w. partitive gen. Hs 8, 2, 9; 9, 7, 4. As adv. acc. for the greatest part 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1 (s. μέρος 1d).
    ב. elative (s. Mayser II/1, 1926, 53) very great, very large (ὁ) πλεῖστος ὄχλος Mt 21:8 (ὁ πλεῖστος ὄχλος could also be the greatest part of the crowd, as Thu. 7, 78, 2; Pla., Rep. 3, 397d); Mk 4:1.
    β. subst. οἱ πλεῖστοι the majority, most Ac 19:32 D (Just., D. 1, 4; cp. D. 48, 4 πλεῖστοι).
    pert. to being high on a scale of extent
    positive πολύς, πολλή, πολύ
    α. as simple adj., to denote degree much, great, strong, severe, hard, deep, profound (Diod S 13, 7, 4 πολὺς φόβος; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 57; 58 p. 265, 3 πολλὴ δικαιοσύνη; Eccl 5:16 θυμὸς π.; Sir 15:18 σοφία; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 4 [Stone p. 54] ἀθυμία; Just., D. 3, 1 ἠρεμία) ἀγάπη Eph 2:4. ἀγών 1 Th 2:2. ἄθλησις Hb 10:32. ἁπλότης Hv 3, 9, 1. ἀσιτία Ac 27:21. βία 24:6 [7] v.l. γογγυσμός J 7:12. διακονία Lk 10:40. δοκιμή 2 Cor 8:2. δόξα Mt 24:30; Hv 1, 3, 4; 2, 2, 6. δύναμις Mk 13:26. ἐγκράτεια strict self-control Hv 2, 3, 2. εἰρήνη complete or undisturbed peace (Diod S 3, 64, 7; 11, 38, 1) Ac 24:2. ἔλεος 1 Pt 1:3. ἐπιθυμία 1 Th 2:17. ζημία Ac 27:10. ζήτησις 15:7. θλῖψις 2 Cor 2:4a; 1 Th 1:6. καύχησις 2 Cor 7:4b (pred.). μακροθυμία Ro 9:22. ὀδυρμός Mt 2:18. παράκλησις 2 Cor 8:4. παρρησία (Wsd 5:1) 3:12; 7:4a (pred.); 1 Ti 3:13; Phlm 8. πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22c. πλάνη 2 Cl 1:7. πληροφορία 1 Th 1:5. πόνος Col 4:13. σιγή a great or general hush (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 25; Arrian, Anab. 5, 28, 4) Ac 21:40. στάσις 23:10. τρόμος 1 Cor 2:3. φαντασία Ac 25:23. χαρά 8:8; Phlm 7. ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) Mk 6:35ab.
    β. subst. πολλά in the acc. used as adv. greatly, earnestly, strictly, loudly, often etc. (X., Cyr. 1, 5, 14; Diod S 13, 41, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 19, 2; Aelian, VH 1, 23; 4 Km 10:18; Is 23:16; TestSol 1:1; GrBar; ApcMos; Jos., Ant. 14, 348) ἀλαλάζειν πολλά Mk 5:38 (s. ἀλαλάζω). πολλὰ ἁμαρτάνειν Hs 4:5c (ApcMos 32). π. ἀνακρίνειν Ac 28:18 v.l. π. ἀπορεῖν Mk 6:20 (Field, Notes 29). π. ἀσπάζεσθαι 1 Cor 16:19 (s. ἀσπάζομαι 1a). δεηθῆναι π. (GrBar 4:14; Jos., Vi. 173; 343) Hs 5, 4, 1. διαστέλλεσθαι Mk 5:43 (s. διαστέλλω). π. ἐπιτιμᾶν 3:12. π. ἐρωτᾶν earnestly pray Hv 2, 2, 1. κατηγορεῖν π. Mk 15:3 (s. κατηγορέω 1a). κηρύσσειν π. talk freely 1:45. κλαίειν bitterly Ac 8:24 D (ApcMos 39). κοπιᾶν (ApcMos 24; CIG IV 9552, 5 … μοι πολλὰ ἐκοπίασεν, cp. Dssm., LO 266, 5 [LAE 317]) work hard Ro 16:6, 12; 2 Cl 7:1b. νηστεύειν π. fast often Mt 9:14a. ὀμνύναι π. Mk 6:23. παρακαλεῖν Mk 5:10, 23; Ac 20:1 D; 1 Cor 16:12. π. πταίειν make many mistakes Js 3:2. π. σπαράσσειν convulse violently Mk 9:26a.—W. the art. ἐνεκοπτόμην τὰ πολλά I have been hindered these many times (cp. Ro 1:13 πολλάκις) Ro 15:22 (v.l. πολλάκις here too).
    γ. subst. πολύ in the acc. used as adv. greatly, very much, strongly (Da 6:15, 24 Theod.) ἀγαπᾶν πολύ show much affection, love greatly Lk 7:47b. κλαίειν π. weep loudly Rv 5:4.—Mk 12:27; Ac 18:27.
    superlative, the neut. acc. πλεῖστον, α as adv. (sing. Hom. et al.; pl. Pind. et al.)
    α. pl. πλεῖστα in the formula of greeting at the beginning of a letter πλεῖστα χαίρειν (POxy 742; 744; 1061 [all three I B.C.]; PTebt 314, 2 [II A.D.] and very oft. in pap.—Griech. pap ed. Ltzm.: Kl. Texte 142, 1910, p. 4, 5, 6, 7 al.; Preis. II s.v. πλεῖστος) heartiest greeting(s) IEph ins; IMg ins; ITr ins; IRo ins; ISm ins; IPol ins.
    β. sing. τὸ πλεῖστον at the most (Aristoph., Vesp. 260; Diod S 14, 71, 3 πεμπταῖοι ἢ τὸ πλ. ἑκταῖοι; POxy 58, 17; PGiss 65:9) κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλ. τρεῖς (word for word like Περὶ ὕψους 32, 1) 1 Cor 14:27.—B. 922f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πολύς

  • 19 φημί

    φημί 2 sg. φῄς (Just.), 3 sg. φησίν, 3 pl. φασίν Ro 3:8; 2 Cor 10:10 v.l.; 3 sg. of impf. and 2 aor. ἔφη (s. Kühner-Bl. II 210), 3 pl. ἔφασαν (Esth 10:31; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 5 Jac. [Eus., PE 9, 29, 16]); fut. φήσω (Just.); 1 aor. 3 sg. ἔφησεν 2 Macc 3:27 al. (Hom.+).
    to state someth. orally or in writing, say, affirm w. direct discourse
    w. interchange of first and third persons in dialogue Hv 2, 4, 1; 3, 2, 1; 3, 3, 1f and oft.
    introducing direct discourse
    α. preceding it ὁ δέ φησιν• οὔ, μήποτε … Mt 13:29. Cp. 26:61; 27:11, 23; Mk 10:29; J 9:38; 18:29; Ac 7:2; 8:36; 10:30 al. Oft. w. dat. of the pers. addressed ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς• πάλιν γέγραπται … Mt 4:7. Cp. 13:28; 21:27; Mk 9:12; 14:29; Lk 7:44; Ac 26:32. Also πρός τινα (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 7 [Stone p. 40]) Lk 22:70; Ac 10:28; 16:37; 26:1.—Used w. a ptc. to denote the nature of the statement ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ἑκατόνταρχος ἔφη• κύριε … Mt 8:8. Cp. Lk 23:3, 40.
    β. inserted after the first word or words of the direct discourse (Oenomaus in Eus., PE 6, 7, 8 ἀγγελῶ, νὴ Δία, φήσει τις, …; TestJob 34:4; JosAs 24:8; Just., D. 1, 3) δός μοι, φησίν, ὧδε … Mt 14:8. ποίας; φησίν 19:18 v.l. Cp. Lk 7:40 (here φησίν stands at the close of a direct quot. consisting of only two words; cp. Just., D. 3, 7 οὐ γάρ, φημί); Ac 2:38 v.l.; 23:35; 25:5, 22; 26:25. ὡς ἔφην Papias (2:15) (ApcMos 42).
    without a subj., where it is self-evident ὅρα γάρ φησιν ποιήσεις πάντα for see to it, (God) says (Ex 25:40; Just., D. 126, 6; Mel., P. 12, 78; Ath. 32, 1), you must make everything Hb 8:5. But φησίν is also used impersonally, it is said, so that it can also go w. a plural subject that makes a statement (cp. Demosth. 23, 31; ViJer 8 [p. 72, 12 Sch.]; Epict., Enchir. 24, 2; Maximus Tyr. 5, 4a) αἱ ἐπιστολαὶ μέν, φησίν, βαρεῖαι 2 Cor 10:10 (the subject of this statement is the opposition to Paul in the Corinthian church; hence the v.l. φασίν). οὐ δεῖν, φησίν (i.e. gnostics) προφήταις χρῆσθαι AcPlCor 1:10. W. scripture quotations φησίν it says (φησίν abs. w. a quot. fr. Aratus: Synes., Prov. 2, 5 p. 125a) 1 Cor 6:16; 1 Cl 30:2; 2 Cl 7:6; B 7:7.
    φησίν, in introducing scripture quot., can be pred. to a wide variety of subjects (cp. φησὶν ὁ λόγος Pla., Phil. 51c; Maximus Tyr. 22, 5b; Just., D. 93, 3) φησὶν ὁ ἅγιος λόγος 1 Cl 13:3. (τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον) 16:2. αὐτός (=ὁ κύριος) φησιν 16:15. ὁ θεός 33:5. ὁ ἐκλεκτὸς Δαυίδ 52:2.
    to say someth. that provides a fuller explanation of a statement, mean by one’s statement (Artem. 1, 67 p. 62, 16 φημὶ δὲ ἐγώ=but I mean), w. acc. (Diod S 37, 29, 5 Κράσσον φημί; Syntipas p. 10, 12) τοῦτο 1 Cor 7:29; cp. 10:15, 19. Foll. by ὅτι 1 Cor 10:19 (Caecil. Calact., Fgm. 103 p. 93, 18 ἀλλὰ τί φημι; ὅτι κτλ.); τοῦτο ὅτι 15:50. Foll. by acc. and inf. (Synes., Kingship 15 p. 14c) Ro 3:8; Papias (3:2).—HFournier, Les verbes ‘dire’ en Grec ancien ’46. B. 1257. DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > φημί

  • 20 ἵνα

    ἵνα (Hom.+) conjunction, the use of which increased considerably in H. Gk. as compared w. earlier times because it came to be used periphrastically for the inf. and impv. B-D-F §369; 379; 388–94 al.; Mlt. index; Rob. index.
    marker to denote purpose, aim, or goal, in order that, that, final sense
    w. subjunctive, not only after a primary tense, but also (in accordance w. Hellenistic usage) after a secondary tense (B-D-F §369, 1; Rob. 983; Mlt-Turner 100–102; JKnuenz, De enuntiatis Graecorum finalibus 1913, 15ff):
    α. after a present tense Mk 4:21; 7:9; Lk 6:34; 8:16; J 3:15; 5:34; 6:30; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 16:30; Ro 1:11; 3:19; 11:25; 1 Cor 9:12; Gal 6:13; Phil 3:8; Hb 5:1; 6:12; 1J 1:3 and oft.
    β. after a perfect Mt 1:22; 21:4; J 5:23, 36; 6:38; 12:40, 46; 14:29; 16:1, 4; 17:4; 1 Cor 9:22b al.
    γ. after a pres. or aor. impv. Mt 7:1; 14:15; 17:27; 23:26; Mk 11:25; J 4:15; 5:14; 10:38; 1 Cor 7:5; 11:34; 1 Ti 4:15; Tit 3:13. Likew. after the hortatory subj. in the first pers. pl. Mk 1:38; Lk 20:14; J 11:16; Hb 4:16.
    δ. after a fut. Lk 16:4; 18:5; J 5:20; 14:3, 13, 16; 1 Cor 15:28; Phil 1:26.
    ε. after a secondary tense: impf. Mk 3:2; 6:41; 8:6; Lk 6:7; 18:15 al.—Plpf. J 4:8.—Aor. Mt 19:13; Mk 3:14; 11:28; 14:10; Lk 19:4, 15; J 7:32; 12:9; Ro 7:4; 2 Cor 8:9; Hb 2:14; 11:35; 1J 3:5.
    w. fut. ind. (LXX e.g. Sus 28; En 15:5; TestSol 13:7; SIG 888, 87ff; OGI 665, 35; POxy 299; 1071, 5 ἵνα ποιήσουσιν καὶ πέμψουσιν; Gen 16:2 [Swete; ARahlfs, Genesis 1926 v.l.] al.; Just., D. 115, 6), beside which the aor. subj. is usu. found in the mss. (B-D-F §369, 2; Rob. 984; Mlt-Turner 100) ἵνα σταυρώσουσιν Mk 15:20 v.l. ἵνα ἐρεῖ σοι Lk 14:10. ἵνα δώσουσιν 20:10. ἵνα θεωρήσουσιν J 7:3. ἵνα δώσει 17:2 v.l.; Rv 8:3. ἐπισκιάσει Ac 5:15 v.l.; ξυρήσονται 21:24. κερδανῶ 1 Cor 9:21 v.l.; καυθήσομαι 13:3 v.l. καταδουλώσουσιν Gal 2:4. κερδηθήσονται 1 Pt 3:1. ἵνα … δηλώσεις Hv 3, 8, 10. The fut. ind. is also used oft. when ἵνα has no final mng., esp. in Rv: 1 Cor 9:18 (ἵνα as answer, as Epict. 4, 1, 99); Rv 6:4, 11; 9:4, 5, 20; 13:12; 14:13; 22:14. Occasionally the fut. ind. and aor. subj. are found in the same sentence Rv 3:9; cp. also Phil 2:10f v.l. (on this interchange s. Reinhold 106; JVogeser, Zur Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 34f; Knuenz, op. cit. 23ff; 39; Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 7 ἵνα μὴ παρῶ … μηδὲ ἕξουσιν; POxy 1068, 5 ἵνα διαπέμψεται, ἵνα δυνηθῶ …).—On the interchange of pres. subj. and fut. ind. in J 15:8 s. GLee, Biblica 51, ’70, 239f.
    ἵνα is found w. the pres. ind. only in passages where the subj. is also attested in the mss.; its presence is prob. due to corruption of the text (B-D-F §369, 6; Rob. 984f; Mlt-Turner 100f. But see the clear instance in PAnt III, 188, 15: ἵνα μή ἐσμεν, and cp. BGU 1081, 3 ἐχάρην, ἵνα σὲ ἀσπάζομαι; TestNapht 8:2; PassPtPl 60 [Aa I, 170, 8] ἵνα κατευθύνει; AcPtPl 58 [Aa I, 203, 17]; AcPlTh 11 [Aa I, 243, 11 v.l.]). φυσιοῦσθε 1 Cor 4:6 and ζηλοῦτε Gal 4:17 could be subj. (B-D-F §91; Rob. 984). But Gal 6:12 v.l. διώκονται; Tit 2:4 v.l. σωφρονίζουσιν; J 5:20 v.l. θαυμάζετε; 17:3 v.l. γινώσκουσιν; 1J 5:20 v.l. γινώσκομεν; Rv 12:6 v.l. τρέφουσιν; 13:17 v.l. δύναται; ἵνα σύνετε B 6:5 v.l. (in text συνιῆτε; v.l. συνῆτε); ἵνα … ᾂδετε IEph 4:2 (Lghtf. ᾂδητε); μετέχετε ibid. (v.l. μετέχητε). διατάσσομαι ITr 3:3 (v.l. διατάσσωμαι). βλασφημεῖται 8:2 v.l.
    The opt. after ἵνα is not used in our lit. (B-D-F §369, 1; 386, 3; Rob. 983). Mk 12:2 v.l. ἵνα λάβοι (for λάβῃ). Eph 1:17 ἵνα δῴη (v.l. δῷ) is certainly subj., and δώῃ is the correct rdg. (B-D-F §95, 2; Mlt. 196f). Likew. ἵνα παραδοῖ J 13:2.
    after a demonstrative (Epict. 2, 5, 16 ἐν τούτῳ … ἵνα) εἰς τοῦτο for this (purpose, namely) that J 18:37; 1J 3:8; Ro 14:9; 2 Cor 2:9; 1 Pt 3:9; 4:6; B 5:1, 11; 14:5. εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο for this very purpose, that Eph 6:22; Col 4:8. διὰ τοῦτο for this reason … that (Himerius, Or. 14, 3) 2 Cor 13:10; Phlm 15; 1 Ti 1:16; the ἵνα clause can also precede διὰ τοῦτο J 1:31. τούτου χάριν … ἵνα for this reason … that Tit 1:5.
    ἵνα with ‘I should like to say this’ supplied is found also in earlier Gk (Soph. Ph. 989) Mk 2:10 (B-D-F §470, 3. Differently [a virtual impv.] DSharp, ET 38, 1927, 427f). The necessary supplement precedes in ἵνα δείξῃ (he said this), in order to show B 7:5.—Cp. J 15:13.
    marker of objective, that. Very oft. the final mng. is greatly weakened or disappears altogether. In this case the ἵνα-constr. serves as a substitute for an inf. that supplements a verb, or an acc. w. inf. (cp. Od. 3, 327 and a spurious document in Demosth. 18, 155. Later very common, also in ins, pap [Rdm.2 191ff]; LXX).
    after verbs w. the sense
    α. ‘wish, desire, strive’ (PGiss 17, 5 [II A.D.] ἠγωνίασα … ἵνα ἀκούσω; BGU 1081, 3 ἐχάρην, ἵνα σὲ ἀσπάζομαι) θέλειν ἵνα (TestAbr A 19, 101, 9 [Stone p. 50]) Mt 7:12; Mk 9:30; 10:35; Lk 6:31; J 17:24; 1 Cor 14:5. βουλεύεσθαι J 11:53; 12:10. συμβουλεύεσθαι Mt 26:4. συντίθεσθαι J 9:22. ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι joyfully strive after 8:56 (s. ἀγαλλιάω). ζητεῖν 1 Cor 4:2; 14:12; AcPlCor 2:8. ζηλοῦν 14:1. εὔχεσθαι ‘wish’ IPhld 6:3.
    β. ‘take care, be ashamed, be afraid’ φυλάσσεσθαι 2 Pt 3:17. προσέχειν take care that B 16:8. βλέπειν see to it, that 1 Cor 16:10.
    γ. ‘request, demand’: δεῖσθαι request (Dionys. Hal. 4, 12, 1; Lucian, Dom. 9; Jos., Ant. 6, 321; 12, 125 al.) Lk 9:40; 21:36; 22:32; B 12:7; Pol 6:2; Hv 3, 1, 2; Hs 5, 4, 1. ἐρωτᾶν request (s. ἐρωτάω 2) Mk 7:26; Lk 7:36; 16:27; J 4:47; 17:15 al. (JEarwaker, ET 75, ’64, 316f so interprets the third ἵνα in 17:21). παρακαλεῖν request, exhort (EpArist 318; 321, Jos., Ant. 14, 168) Mt 14:36; Mk 5:18; 6:56; 7:32; 8:22; Lk 8:32; 1 Cor 1:10 al. αἰτεῖσθαι Col 1:9 (Just., D. 30, 2 αἰτοῦμεν). προσεύχεσθαι Mt 24:20; 26:41; Mk 14:35; Lk 22:46; 1 Cor 14:13 al. εὔχεσθαι pray (s. εὔχομαι 1 end) Hs 5, 2, 10. εὐχαριστεῖν Eph 1:16f. ἀξιοῦν demand, request (CIG 4892, 13 [III A.D.]; Jos., Ant. 14, 22) Hv 4, 1, 3. καταξιοῦν ISm 11:1; IPol 7:2.
    δ. ‘summon, encourage, order’ (Epict, 4, 11, 29; 1 Esdr 8:19; EpArist 46) ἀπαγγέλλειν Mt 28:10. παραγγέλλειν (CIG 4957, 48 [68 A.D.] restored) Mk 6:8. διαμαρτύρεσθαι 1 Ti 5:21. ἐντέλλεσθαι (Jos., Ant. 7, 356) Mk 13:34; J 15:17. κηρύσσειν Mk 6:12. διαστέλλεσθαι Mt 16:20; Mk 5:43; 7:36; 9:9. ἐπιτιμᾶν warn Mt 16:20; 20:31; Mk 8:30; 10:48; Lk 18:39. ἐξορκίζειν Mt 26:63. ὁρκίζειν Hs 9, 10, 5. λέγειν order Mt 4:3; 20:21; Mk 3:9; 9:18; Lk 4:3; 10:40; Hv 2, 2, 6. γράφειν write (Jos., Ant. 11, 7; 127) Mk 9:12; 12:19; Lk 20:28. ἀποστέλλειν Ac 16:36.
    ε. ‘cause, bring about’ πείθειν Mt 27:20. ποιεῖν J 11:37; Col 4:16; cp. Rv 3:9; 13:16. τιθέναι appoint J 15:16. ἀγγαρεύειν Mt 27:32; Mk 15:21.
    ζ. ‘permit, grant’ ἀφιέναι Mk 11:16. On J 12:7 s. CBarrett, The Gospel According to St. John2, ’78, 413–14. διδόναι 10:37; Rv 9:5.
    η. συνευδοκεῖν Hs 5, 2, 8.
    after impers. expr.: ἀρκετόν (ἐστι) it is sufficient Mt 10:25. λυσιτελεῖ (εἰ … ἢ ἵνα) Lk 17:2. συμφέρει Mt 5:29f; 18:6; J 11:50. ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν it is a matter of little consequence to me 1 Cor 4:3. ἔδει B 5:13. πολλὰ λείπει Hv 3, 1, 9.
    after nouns and adjs., esp. when they are parts of fixed expressions:
    α. χρείαν ἔχειν J 2:25; 16:30; 1J 2:27. ἔστιν συνήθεια J 18:39. θέλημά ἐστιν Mt 18:14; J 6:40; 1 Cor 16:12b. βουλὴ ἐγένετο Ac 27:42. ἐντολή (cp. Polyb. 36, 17, 10 νόμος) J 15:12; 11:57; 13:34; Ac 17:15; 2J 6. δέησις Eph 6:19. ἐξουσία Ac 8:19. ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν J 4:34. τίς ἐστιν ὁ μισθός; ἵνα … 1 Cor 9:18.
    β. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανός Mt 8:8; Lk 7:6. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος J 1:27; cp. Hs 9, 28, 5. S. B-D-F §379; Rob. 996.
    after nouns mng. time: χρόνον διδόναι, ἵνα give time Rv 2:21. ἔρχεται ἡ ὥρα the time comes (Aesop, Fab. 242 H. ἡ ἡμέρα, ἵνα=the day on which) J 12:23; 13:1; 16:2, 32. S. B-D-F §382, 1; 393.
    ἵνα can also take the place of the explanatory inf. after a demonstrative (B-D-F §394; Rdm.2 192.—Wsd 13:9; Just., D. 14, 2 τοῦτο γάρ ἐστι τὸ σύμβολον τῶν ἀζύμων, ἵνα μὴ …) Mk 11:28. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο ἵνα ἔλθῃ (for τὸ ἐλθεῖν τὴν κτλ.) Lk 1:43 (cp. GJs 12:2). τοῦτο προσεύχομαι ἵνα Phil 1:9. cp. 1 Cor 9:18. This is a favorite usage in J: τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ ἵνα πιστεύητε (for τὸ πιστεύειν ὑμᾶς) 6:29; cp. vs. 50. μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει ἵνα … θῇ (for τοῦ θεῖναι) 15:13; cp. 3J 4.—J 6:39; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 4:21; 5:3; 2J 6a. ἐν τούτῳ: ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ πατήρ μου ἵνα … φέρητε (for ἐν τῷ φέρειν ὑμᾶς ἐδοξάσθη) J 15:8; cp. 1J 4:17.—S. also Hs 9, 28, 4, and ποταπὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα 1J 3:1.
    ἵνα is used elliptically ἀλλʼ ἵνα but this has happened that, where the verb to be supplied must be inferred fr. the context (Epict. 1, 12, 17): ἀλλʼ ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ (sc. ἦλθεν) J 1:8. ἀλλʼ (ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον) ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν but it was hidden that it might be revealed Mk 4:22 (but cp. CCadoux, JTS 42, ’41, 169 n. 3). ἀλλʼ (κρατεῖτέ με) ἵνα πληρωθῶσιν but you are holding me (prisoner), that 14:49. ἀλλʼ (ἐγένετο τυφλὸς) ἵνα φανερωθῇ J 9:3. ἀλλʼ (ἀποθνῄσκει) ἵνα … συναγάγῃ 11:52.—13:18; Hv 3, 8, 10 (cp. 1b above).
    ἵνα w. subjunctive as a periphrasis for the impv. (B-D-F §387, 3; Mlt. 178; 210f; 248; Rob. 994; Mlt-Turner 94f; FSlotty, D. Gebr. des Konj. u. Opt. in d. griech. Dialekten I 1915, 35; CCadoux, The Impv. Use of ἵνα in the NT: JTS 42, ’41, 165–73; in reply HMeecham, JTS 43, ’42, 179f, also ET 52, ’40/41, 437; AGeorge, JTS 45, ’44, 56–60. Goodsp., Probs. 57f.—Soph., Oed. Col. 155; Epict. 4, 1, 41, Enchir. 17; PTebt 408, 17 [3 A.D.]; BGU 1079, 20; PFay 112, 12; POxy 299, 5 ἵνʼ εἰδῇς ‘know’; PGM 4, 2135; Tob 8:12 BA; 2 Macc 1:9. ἵνα πρὶν τούτων ἴδητε τὴν ἀπώλειαν τῶν υἱῶν ‘before these events, you shall behold the destruction of your sons’ En 14:6. κύριε, ἵνα γινώσκῃ τὸ σὸν κράτος ὅτι ‘Lord, may you in your majesty know, that …’ TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 35f [Stone pp. 8 and 10]). ἵνα ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ please lay your hands on her Mk 5:23. ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἵνα φοβῆται τ. ἄνδρα the wife is to respect her husband Eph 5:33. Cp. Mt 20:33; Mk 10:51; 1 Cor 7:29; 16:16; 2 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:10. ἵνα ἀναπαήσονται let them rest Rv 14:13. W. θέλω: θέλω ἵνα δῷς Mk 6:25 (=δός Mt 14:8.).—On Mk 2:10 s. 1f above.
    ἵνα without a finite verb, which can be supplied fr. the context (Epict. 3, 23, 4 ἵνα ὡς ἄνθρωπος, i.e. ἐργάζῃ) ἵνα ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν (i.e. εὐαγγελιζώμεθα and εὐαγγελίζωνται) Gal 2:9. ἵνα κατὰ χάριν (γένηται) Ro 4:16. ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις (γένηται) 2 Cor 8:13. ἵνα (γένηται) καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Cor 1:31 (B-D-F §481; Rob. 1202f).
    marker serving as substitute for the inf. of result, so that (‘ecbatic’ or consecutive use of ἵνα: B-D-F §391, 5; Mlt. 206–9; Rob. 997–99 and in SCase, Studies in Early Christianity [Porter-Bacon Festschr.] 1928, 51–57; EBlakeney, ET 53, ’41/42, 377f, indicating that the result is considered probable, but not actual. But this distinction is not always strictly observed. Cp. Epict. 1, 24, 3; 25, 15; 27, 8 al.; 2, 2, 16 οὕτω μωρὸς ἦν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδῃ; Vett. Val. 185, 31; 186, 17; 292, 20; Jos., Bell. 6, 107; Just., D. 112, 5; PLond III, 964, 13 p. 212 [II/III A.D.]. Many exx. in AJannaris, An Historical Greek Grammar 1897 §1758 and 1951) ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπʼ αὐτῶν ἵνα μὴ αἴσθωνται αὐτό it was concealed from them, so that they might not comprehend it Lk 9:45. τίς ἥμαρτεν, ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ; Who sinned, so that he was born blind? J 9:2. Cp. 2 Cor 1:17; Gal 5:17; 1 Th 5:4; 1J 1:9; Rv 9:20; 13:13; Hs 7:2; 9, 1, 10.—In many cases purpose and result cannot be clearly differentiated, and hence ἵνα is used for the result that follows according to the purpose of the subj. or of God. As in Semitic and Gr-Rom. thought, purpose and result are identical in declarations of the divine will (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 16, 10 the rule of the Persian king is being overthrown by the deity ἵνα Δαρεῖος … φυγὰς γενόμενος κτλ. Here ἵνα means both ‘in order that’ and ‘so that’): Lk 11:50; J 4:36; 12:40; 19:28; Ro 3:19; 5:20; 7:13; 8:17; 11:31f al. (ESutcliffe, Effect or Purpose, Biblica 35, ’54, 320–27). The formula ἵνα πληρωθῇ is so to be understood, since the fulfillment is acc. to God’s plan of salvation: Mt 1:22; 2:15; 4:14; 12:17; 21:4; 26:56; J 12:38; 17:12; 19:24, 36.—The ἵνα of Mk 4:12=Lk 8:10, so much in dispute, is prob. to be taken as final (w. AvVeldhuizen, NTS 8, 1925, 129–33; 10, 1927, 42–44; HWindisch, ZNW 26, 1927, 203–9; JGnilka, Die Verstockung Israels ’61, 45–48; B-D-F §369, 2 [here, and B-D-R p. 386f n. 2, the lit. on ‘causal’ ἵνα, which is allowed at least for Rv 22:14 and perh. 14:13, where P47 has ὅτι; see 2g]. S. also FLaCava, Scuola Cattol. 65, ’37, 301–4; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 211–16; ISluiter, Causal ἵνα, Sound Greek: Glotta 70, ’92, 39–53. On J 12:7 s. τηρέω 2a).
    marker of retroactive emphasis, that. At times, contrary to regular usage, ἵνα is placed elsewhere than at the beginning of its clause, in order to emphasize the words that come before it (B-D-F §475, 1; cp. the position of ὅτι Gal 1:11): τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε 2 Cor 2:4. εἰς τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετʼ αὐτὸν ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει ἵνα Ro 11:31. Cp. J 13:29; 1 Cor 7:29; Gal 2:10; Col 4:16b.—EStauffer, Ἵνα u. d. Problem d. teleol. Denkens b. Pls: StKr 102, 1930, 232–57; JGreenlee, ἵνα Substantive Clauses in the NT: Asbury Seminarian 2, ’47, 154–63; HRiesenfeld, Zu d. johanneischen ἵνα-Sätzen, StTh 19, ’65, 213–20; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 76–81.—Frisk. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἵνα

См. также в других словарях:

  • Mama Used to Say — Single by Junior from the album Ji Released 1982 …   Wikipedia

  • say no more — spoken phrase used for saying that you understand the hidden meaning of something and do not need any more details ‘She’s invited Carl to her party.’ ‘Say no more!’ Thesaurus: ways of saying that you know, understand or agreesynonym Main entry:… …   Useful english dictionary

  • say — say1 W1S1 [seı] v past tense and past participle said [sed] third person singular says [sez] ▬▬▬▬▬▬▬ 1¦(express something in words)¦ 2¦(give information)¦ 3¦(mean)¦ 4¦(think that something is true)¦ 5¦(show/be a sign of something)¦ 6¦(speak the… …   Dictionary of contemporary English

  • say — 1 /seI/ verb past tense and past participle said /sed/ 3rd person singular says USE WORDS 1 WORD/SOUND (T) to pronounce a word or sound: “What did you say?” | “I m so tired” she said. | say hello/goodbye etc: She left without even saying goodbye …   Longman dictionary of contemporary English

  • used to — adjective in the habit (Freq. 13) I am used to hitchhiking you ll get used to the idea ...was wont to complain that this is a cold world Henry David Thoreau • Syn: ↑wont to • Similar to: ↑accustomed …   Useful english dictionary

  • used\ to — I. adj. phr. In the habit of or familiar with. People get used to smoking and it is hard for them to stop. Farmers are used to working outdoors in the winter. After my eyes became used to the dim light in the cave, I saw an old shovel on the… …   Словарь американских идиом

  • used to(2) — or[did use to] {v. phr.} Did formerly; did in the past. Usually used with an infinitive to tell about something past. * /Uncle Henry used to have a beard, but he shaved it off./ * /Did your father use to work at the bank?/ * /People used to say… …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • used to(2) — or[did use to] {v. phr.} Did formerly; did in the past. Usually used with an infinitive to tell about something past. * /Uncle Henry used to have a beard, but he shaved it off./ * /Did your father use to work at the bank?/ * /People used to say… …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • Say cheese — is an instruction used by photographers who are having difficulty getting their subject to smile. By saying cheese , most people form their mouths into what appears to be a smile like shape. Additionally, the absurdity of saying cheese for no… …   Wikipedia

  • used to — W2S1 [ˈju:st tu:] modal v 1.) if something used to happen, it happened regularly or all the time in the past, but does not happen now ▪ He used to go to our school. ▪ We re eating out more often than we used to. did not use to do sth ▪ You didn t …   Dictionary of contemporary English

  • say — vb Say, utter, tell, state are comparable when they mean to put into words. Say often means merely to articulate or pronounce {say the words after me} {the baby has not yet learned to say mama or daddy } or is used in reporting something voiced… …   New Dictionary of Synonyms

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»